MS-860 USER`S MANUAL

Add to my manuals
290 Pages

advertisement

MS-860 USER`S MANUAL | Manualzz

Cat. No. MS860MAN

MS-860

Industral Rastor Reader

USER'S

MANUAL

M

S-860

Industrial Raster

Reader User Manual

P/N 83-0008

Copyright © 2005 by Microscan Systems, Inc.,

ISO 9001/Certification No. 00-1047

All rights reserved. The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and/or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission.

Throughout this manual, trademarked names might be used. Rather than put a trademark (™) symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement.

Disclaimer

The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice.

ii

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Quick Start

Step 1 Connect the System..................................................................... 1-2

Step 2 Install ESP.................................................................................... 1-3

Step 3 Select Reader Model.................................................................... 1-4

Step 4 Autoconnect ................................................................................. 1-5

Step 5 Position Symbol and Reader........................................................ 1-6

Step 6 Test for Read Rate....................................................................... 1-7

Step 7 Calibrate the Reader .................................................................... 1-8

Step 8 Configure the Reader................................................................... 1-9

Chapter 2 Using ESP

EZ Mode .................................................................................................. 2-2

Application Mode ..................................................................................... 2-3

Pulldown Menus ...................................................................................... 2-4

Connect Menu ......................................................................................... 2-9

View...................................................................................................... 2-11

Navigating in ESP.................................................................................. 2-12

Send/Receive Options........................................................................... 2-12

Chapter 3 EZ Button

EZ Button by ESP.................................................................................... 3-2

EZ Button by Serial Command ................................................................ 3-2

EZ Button Operation................................................................................ 3-3

EZ Button Modes..................................................................................... 3-4

EZ Button Options ................................................................................... 3-6

Chapter 4 Calibration

Calibration by ESP .................................................................................. 4-2

Calibration by Serial Command............................................................... 4-2

Calibration Overview ............................................................................... 4-3

Calibrating a Symbol ............................................................................... 4-4

Calibration Dialog .................................................................................... 4-5

Calibration Options .................................................................................. 4-6

Chapter 5 Configuration Database

Configuration by ESP .............................................................................. 5-2

Configuration by Serial Command........................................................... 5-2

Overview of Configuration Database....................................................... 5-2

Setup for Configuration Database ........................................................... 5-3

Operation of Database ............................................................................ 5-4

Save Current Settings to Database ......................................................... 5-7

Load Current Settings to Database ......................................................... 5-7

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

iii

Table of Contents

Chapter 6 Communications

Communications by ESP......................................................................... 6-2

Communications by Serial Command ..................................................... 6-2

RS-232/422 Host Port ............................................................................. 6-3

RS-232 Auxiliary Port .............................................................................. 6-8

Auxiliary Port System Data.................................................................... 6-18

Preamble ............................................................................................... 6-19

Postamble ............................................................................................. 6-20

LRC Status ............................................................................................ 6-21

Response Timeout ................................................................................ 6-22

Chapter 7 Read Cycle

Read Cycle by ESP................................................................................. 7-2

Read Cycle by Serial Command ............................................................. 7-3

Multisymbol ............................................................................................. 7-4

Trigger ..................................................................................................... 7-6

Serial Trigger......................................................................................... 7-12

End of Read Cycle ................................................................................ 7-14

Decodes Before Output......................................................................... 7-16

Reader Setup ........................................................................................ 7-17

Laser Setup ........................................................................................... 7-22

Raster Setup ......................................................................................... 7-22

Chapter 8 Raster/Laser

Raster/Laser Setup by ESP .................................................................... 8-2

Raster/Laser Setup by Serial Command................................................. 8-2

Raster Setup ........................................................................................... 8-3

Laser Setup ............................................................................................. 8-6

Chapter 9 Symbologies

Symbologies by ESP............................................................................... 9-2

Symbologies by Serial Command ........................................................... 9-3

1D Symbologies ...................................................................................... 9-4

Stacked Symbologies............................................................................ 9-26

Narrow Margins ..................................................................................... 9-29

Symbology ID ........................................................................................ 9-30

Background Color.................................................................................. 9-31

Autodiscriminate.................................................................................... 9-31

Chapter 10 I/O Parameters

I/O Parameters by ESP ......................................................................... 10-2

I/O Parameters by Serial Command ..................................................... 10-3

Symbol Data Output .............................................................................. 10-4

Noread Message ................................................................................... 10-7

Bad Symbol Message ........................................................................... 10-8

No Symbol Message ............................................................................. 10-9

Output Indicators ................................................................................. 10-10

iv

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Serial Verification................................................................................. 10-12

EZ Button............................................................................................. 10-14

Input..................................................................................................... 10-15

Output 1............................................................................................... 10-16

Output 2............................................................................................... 10-23

Output 3............................................................................................... 10-24

Quality Output...................................................................................... 10-25

Database Number Output.................................................................... 10-26

Symbol Position Output ....................................................................... 10-27

Read Duration Output.......................................................................... 10-30

Chapter 11 Matchcode

Matchcode by ESP ................................................................................ 11-2

Matchcode by Serial Command ............................................................ 11-2

Overview of Matchcode ......................................................................... 11-3

Using Master Symbols........................................................................... 11-3

Matchcode Type .................................................................................... 11-4

Sequential Matching .............................................................................. 11-5

Match Start Position .............................................................................. 11-6

Match Length......................................................................................... 11-7

Wild Card Character .............................................................................. 11-8

Sequence on Noread............................................................................. 11-9

Sequence on Mismatch ....................................................................... 11-10

Sequence Step .................................................................................... 11-11

New Master Pin ................................................................................... 11-11

Match Replace..................................................................................... 11-12

Mismatch Replace ............................................................................... 11-13

Chapter 12 Diagnostics

Diagnostics by ESP ............................................................................... 12-2

Diagnostics by Serial Command ........................................................... 12-2

Diagnostic Messages Overview ............................................................ 12-3

Counts ................................................................................................... 12-4

Hours Since Last Reset......................................................................... 12-6

Laser High ............................................................................................. 12-7

Laser Low .............................................................................................. 12-8

High Temperature.................................................................................. 12-9

Low Temperature .................................................................................. 12-9

Service Message ................................................................................. 12-10

Chapter 13 Output Format

Output Format by ESP .......................................................................... 13-2

Output Format by Serial Command....................................................... 13-2

Output Format Overview ....................................................................... 13-3

Extraction Mode..................................................................................... 13-4

Insertion Mode....................................................................................... 13-6

Multisymbol Output Format Status ........................................................ 13-8

Ordered Output.................................................................................... 13-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

v

Table of Contents

Chapter 14 Terminal Mode

Terminal Window................................................................................... 14-2

Find Function......................................................................................... 14-3

Macros................................................................................................... 14-4

Terminal Window Functions .................................................................. 14-5

Chapter 15 Utilities

Utilities by ESP...................................................................................... 15-2

Read Rate ............................................................................................. 15-3

Counters................................................................................................ 15-4

Device Control....................................................................................... 15-6

Master Symbol Database ...................................................................... 15-8

Digital Bar Code .................................................................................. 15-12

Firmware ............................................................................................. 15-13

Symbol Type ....................................................................................... 15-15

Defaulting/Saving/Resetting ................................................................ 15-16

Appendices

Appendix A General Specifications .........................................................A-2

Appendix B Electrical Specifications .......................................................A-4

Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands..........................................A-8

Appendix D Serial Command Format....................................................A-12

Appendix E ASCII Table........................................................................A-14

Appendix F Defaulting/Saving/Resetting...............................................A-16

Appendix G Symbol Configuration ........................................................A-18

Appendix H Formulas for Number of Decodes......................................A-20

Appendix I Operational Tips ..................................................................A-23

Appendix J Embedded Menus ..............................................................A-24

Appendix K Interface Standards............................................................A-25

Appendix L Multidrop Communications.................................................A-26

Appendix M Glossary of Terms .............................................................A-31

Index

vi

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Table of Contents

About the MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader

Programmable firmware allows considerable control of multiple features, including 3 programmable relay outputs and new master and trigger inputs.

A user interface program, ESP (Easy Setup Program) runs on Microsoft's

Windows 98™, Windows NT™, Windows 2000™, or Windows XP operating systems.

Contact your Omron representative for information.

Important: The MS-860 is different from the MS-850 in trigger polarity and the calculation of raster sweeps.

About This Manual

This manual provides complete information on setting up, installing, and configuring the reader. The chapters are presented in the order in which a reader might be setup and made ready for industrial operation. Host serial commands are presented side-by-side with ESP menus and wherever possible follow the order presented in ESP.

Chapter 1,

"Quick Start"

, provides overall step-by-step instructions for getting your reader operational with specific “go to” references to other chapters and appendices.

Host Communications

There are four ways the reader can be programmed:

1. Windows™-based ESP™, the preferred method, which offers point-and-click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments.

2. Serial commands such as

<K100,1>

can be sent from a terminal program. They can also be sent from the Terminal window within ESP.

Note: You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number, as in

<K100?>

To see all “

K

” commands, send

<K?>

.

3. Embedded menus. See

"Embedded Menus"

on page A-24.

4. Bar code symbol configuration. See

"Symbol Configuration"

on page A-18.

Highlighting

Serial commands, selections inside instructions, and menu defaults are highlighted in

rust bold

.

1

Cross-references are highlighted in

blue

. Web links and outside references are highlighted in

blue bold italics

.

References to menu topics are highlighted in Bold Initial Caps. References to topic headings within this manual or other documents are enclosed in quotation marks.

viii

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Safety Labels

These labels are located on the MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader.

S/N Label:

Safety Label

Approvals Pending

This equipment is in compliance or approved by the following organizations:

• UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)

• cUL (UL mark of Canada)

• FCC (Federal Communication Commission)

• CE Compliant

• BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspection)

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

ix

x

Table of Contents

Warning and Caution Summary

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

European models must use a similarly rated Class I or Class II power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950.

Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser light radiation exposure.

There are no user serviceable parts in the reader. Opening the reader voids the

Microscan Systems warranty and could expose the user to laser diode power of up to 7 mW.

The laser beam can be harmful to eyesight. Avoid eye contact with the laser beam. Never point the beam at other people, or in a direction where people may be passing.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Quick Start

Chapter Contents

Step 1 Connect the System.........................................................................1-2

Step 2 Install ESP .......................................................................................1-3

Step 3 Select Reader Model .......................................................................1-4

Step 4 Autoconnect .....................................................................................1-5

Step 5 Position Symbol and Reader ...........................................................1-6

Step 6 Test for Read Rate...........................................................................1-7

Step 7 Calibrate the Reader........................................................................1-8

Step 8 Configure the Reader.......................................................................1-9

This section is designed to get the reader up and running quickly so the user can get a sense of its capabilities and test sample symbols. Detailed setup information for configuring the reader for your specific application can be obtained in the subsequent chapters.

1-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Connect the System

Step 1 — Connect the System

Caution: If using your own power supply (see

"Safety Labels"

on page ix), be certain that it is wired correctly and supply voltage is 10 to 28 VDC. Incorrect wiring or voltage can cause equipment failures.

When setting up the system, you will need the following:

Item a

Part Number Description

1

FIS-0860-1XXX MS-860 Reader

2

N/A Host computer

3

4

61-300020-01

97-100004-11

(120VAC)

97-100004-12

(240VAC)

Null modem configuration cable

US Power supply

EU Power supply

5

99-4400001-10 Optional object detector a. See the illustration for diagram of system.

2

3

1

Hardware Required

4

5

Caution:

• Be sure all cables are connected BEFORE applying power.

• Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables.

To connect the system, do the following:

1. Connect the reader

(

1

) to the Host (

2

) with the null modem cable (

3

).

Chassis ground

2

Power ground

1

2. Connect the power supply cable (

4

) to the reader’s power connector.

3. If used, connect the object detector cable

(

5

) to the trigger connector.

4. Apply power to the system.

3

Power

+10 to 28 VDC

2

1

Power connector

1

3

3

2

25

4

25-pin host connector

1

Trigger connector

Note: Power connector pins are best identified by their relationship to the notches on the outside edge of the connector.

Connectors on MS-860

1-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Quick Start

Step 2 — Install ESP

(ESP stands for Easy Setup Program.)

ESP is Microscan's proprietary reader setup and testing software. It is not meant to be a tool for a real-time production environment; the purpose of ESP is to provide a quick and easy way to set up and configure your reader.

With your Imager connected to a host computer (Windows™98 or higher), you can use

ESP for configuration and Imager control.

Contact your Omron representative for Software.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

1-3

Select Reader Model

Step 3 — Select Reader Model

When you start the program, the following menu will appear:

Note: If you need to select another model later, click the

Switch Model

button.

1. Select MS-860 from the menu and click

OK

.

If you do not want to make this selection every time you load ESP, uncheck “Show this window at Startup”.

2. Click

Yes

when the connect to the reader dialog appears.

1-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Quick Start

Step 4 — Autoconnect

1. In the Connecting to... dialog, if your communications port is not the default

COM1, use the pull down arrow to change your communications port.

2. Click the

Start

button.

When connected, the CONNECTED message will appear in a green box in the status bar on the bottom right of the dialog.

3. If the connection attempt fails, enable a different Com port, check connections, and try again.

Tip: If you do not see either the CONNECTED or DISCONNECTED message at the bottom of your dialog, try expanding the ESP window horizontally.

Important: When you connect to the reader, the reader’s settings will be loaded into

ESP.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

1-5

Position Symbol and Reader

Step 5 — Position Symbol and Reader

Note: Code 39 is the default code type enabled. If you are uncertain as to your symbology type, enable all codes by selecting the Autodiscriminate macro in EZ Mode.

1. Set up a symbol at the scanning distance you are using in your application.

(See

"Read Ranges"

on page A-3.)

2. Avoid bright light or IR light from other sources, including other readers.

3. Pitch symbol or reader slightly to avoid specular reflection, the return of direct non-diffused light.

Bar code label

Skew axis

Tilt axis

Scanner

Scan line

Pitch axis

Symbol/Reader Position

4. Place symbol in the middle of a rastering pattern.

Note: If using an I 2/5 symbol, verify that the number of characters in the symbol being scanned matches the symbol length enabled for the I 2/5 symbol type. (Default is 10 and 6.)

See

"Interleaved 2 of 5"

on page 9-11.

1-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Quick Start

Step 6 — Test for Read Rate

If you don’t have a test symbol, print out this page and use the symbol here for testing.

Note: To the extent that the sweeping raster pattern extends above and below the symbol, read rates will be diminished. To adjust raster pattern, see

"Raster Setup"

on

page 8-3.

20 mil Code 39 Test Symbol

“20 mil” refers to the width of the narrowest bar (e.g., 7.5 mil = .0075" or

.1905 mm).

By EZ Button

Press and hold the

EZ

button until one beep along with a single green flash is emitted from the reader and the

20% LED turns ON.

Note: This assumes the

EZ

button is in its default mode of operation.

By ESP

After connecting to the reader, ESP will open in EZ Mode.

1. Click the

Test

button in EZ Mode to begin the read rate test.

2. Follow the instructions in Easy Setup Mode screen.

3. To end the Read Rate test, click the

Stop

button.

Note: If the reader is in the default Continuous Read mode and not in read rate or calibration, it will read and beep repeatedly as long as a readable symbol remains in the read range and the read cycle configuration has not changed.

By Serial Commands

From a terminal window,

Send an

<C>

to begin the read rate test.

Send a

<J>

to end the read rate test.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

1-7

Calibrate the Reader

Step 7 — Calibrate the Reader

If, after doing the read rate test, the results are not satisfactory, try the calibration routine.

During the calibration routine, the reader attempts various settings to determine the optimum decode rate for the given conditions. In this process it might do the following:

• Adjust laser power

• Adjust scan motor speed

• Adjust AGC gain and tracking

• Enable Autodiscrimination

(read several symbol types)

The test will end automatically when the optimum combination of settings has been achieved.

See

"Calibration Overview"

on page 4-3 for fuller explanation.

By EZ Button

Press and hold the

EZ

button until you hear two short beeps and see two green flashes and the 40% LED turn ON.

Note: This assumes the

EZ

button is in its default mode of operation.

By ESP

Click the

Calibrate

button in Easy Setup Mode to begin the read rate test.

You can observe the progress of the calibration routine on the Calibration popup.

After calibrating the reader, you can save your new settings to be available on power-on.

By Serial Command

From a terminal window, sending an

<@CAL>

command will start the calibration procedure.

By Embedded Menus

From a terminal window, sending an

<@>

command to access the calibration menu.

See

"Embedded Menus"

on page A-24 for more information.

1-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Quick Start

Step 8 — Configure the Reader

See the succeeding chapters and Appendixes to see specific configuration command explanations for both ESP and serial commands.

See Chapter 2,

"Using ESP"

, for a detailed explanation of ESP features.

By EZ Button

See Chapter 3,

"EZ Button"

, for configuration options and modes.

By ESP

To make change reader settings, or to access the utilities or terminal window, click on the

App Mode

button.

See Chapter 2,

"Using ESP"

.

By Serial Commands

From your terminal program or the terminal screen in ESP, you can enter serial string commands configuration and utility commands as described herein.

Note: You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number, as in

<K100?>

To see all “K” commands, send

<K?>

.

By Embedded Menu

From your terminal program you can send a

<D>

command to access the embedded menus.

See

"Embedded Menus"

on page A-24.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

1-9

Configure the Reader

1-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

2

Using ESP

Chapter Contents

EZ Mode......................................................................................................2-2

Application Mode.........................................................................................2-3

Pulldown Menus ..........................................................................................2-4

Connect Menu .............................................................................................2-9

View...........................................................................................................2-11

Navigating in ESP .....................................................................................2-12

Send/Receive Options...............................................................................2-13

This section is designed to help you understand the structure, elements, and application of the ESP (Easy Setup Program).

When you start up ESP, unless otherwise specified, you will enter the EZ Mode for initial setup. From there, you move easily into the App Mode (application mode) where you can access several configuration and utilities menus.

2-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

EZ Mode

EZ Mode

In EZ Mode you are presented with the

Test

option and, if appropriate for your application, Calibration. After connecting to your reader (or reader) the Setup Mode will first appear. This will provide you with instructions specific to your model that will help you in positioning, testing, and if appropriate, calibrating.

Test

Click the

Test

button to start the read rate test for a quick indication of the read capabilities and the limits of your application. When Decodes per Second is unchecked, the test will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans.

Click

Stop

to end the test.

Calibrate

Some models include a calibration routine that will optimize reads by comparing read rates at various settings in focal lengths, scan speeds, and gain settings.

Test Button

Click here to change from percentage of good decodes to decodes per second

Calibration is available on some models

Saves Calibration results (if available)

Note: This view may be slightly different for each model.

On some models, clicking Autodiscriminate will enable most available symbology types.

Ends the read rate test

2-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Using ESP

Application Mode

From EZ Mode, you can click on the App Mode button to access specific configuration menus, utilities, and a terminal window where serial commands can be entered.

Note that the App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes.

Click this icon to return to EZ Mode

Pulldown menus

Click here to open a terminal window

Click here to access read rate and other utilities

Click this icon to return to this view from Utilities or

Terminal

The calibration process adjusts several parameters to optimize readability

Brings up adjustments to raster and laser beams

Click on icons in this toolbar to access configuration menu trees to make specific changes in configuration

Note: This view may be slightly different for each model.

Note: For specific information on any of the icons shown above in the operations bar or configuration bar, see specific chapters in this document.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

2-3

Pulldown Menus

Pulldown Menus

File

New

Whenever

New

is selected, the default configuration of

ESP is loaded.

Open/Save

When

Save

or

Save As

is selected, the ESP configuration is saved to the host computer’s hard drive and available whenever the same file is selected under

Open

.

Important

: When you save menu changes to your hard drive, these changes are not saved to your reader. The illustration shows how settings can be saved and received between ESP and the reader and ESP and the host hard drive.

(Save to Reader)

(Receive Reader

Settings)

Import/Export

Import

converts the ASCII settings from a text file to ESP configuration settings.

Export

converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file.

2-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Using ESP

Model

In

Model

you can select between models. When you choose another model, your current connection with your present model will be terminated.

To connect to another model, select

New Model

, choose a new model and click

OK

.

Note that all the models you have enabled by selecting will continue to appear in the

Model menu and that the same menu is repeated when clicking the

Switch Model

icon.

When you save your ESP file, you will be saving the settings of all the models defined in a single ESP file.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

2-5

Pulldown Menus

Options

You can use the

Options

menu save memos and set up

ESP Preferences

.

Note: Preferences will be saved and be loaded into ESP when ESP is opened next, whether or not you save the ESP file to the computer.

Preferences

General tab

Reload Last File

At startup, reloads the last file saved to the computer.

Show Model Prompt

At startup, remembers the last connected model and displays it in the

Connecting...

dialog whenever you attempt to connect.

Skip Easy Mode

At startup, Skips the

Easy Mode

and opens directly in the application mode.

Show Connect Prompt

At startup, displays the

Would you like to connect...

prompt.

Receive After Connect

At startup, loads the reader’s settings into ESP. (This is not recommended if you want to preserve your ESP settings for future use.)

Enable ‘Send and Save as Factory Settings’

At startup, enables the

Send and Save as Factory

option in the

Send/Recv

command.

2-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Using ESP

Terminal tab

When

Show Non-Printable Characters

is checked, characters such as

CRLF will be displayed in the terminal window. When

Enhanced Format

is checked, the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting.

Change Keyboard Macros

In this dialog you can first select the function key and then enter your macro keystrokes in the associated key map. For example, to make Ctrl-F5 the keystroke to enable send a trigger character, select

F5

, then in the Ctrl row, enter

<trigger character>

and click

OK

. Then whenever the Ctrl-F5 keystroke is pressed, the trigger character will start the read cycle.

Change Font

Sets the font characteristics for the commands that you type in the terminal window.

Change Echo Font

Sets the font characteristics for text that is echoed back to the screen from the reader.

Toolbar Style

By user selection, displays toolbar buttons as icons, text only, or both (default).

Note: See also Chapter 14,

"Terminal Mode"

.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

2-7

Pulldown Menus

Bar Code Options tab

Sets up the sizing, font, and caption parameters for the bar codes that you can create and print from the Bar

Code Options Dialog under View.

Sizing Information

Sets the bar height (in inches) and bar widths (in thousands of an inch) of the symbols. A bar width of 13 is 0.013 inches.

Caption

Sets the characteristics of caption font and its placement in relation to the symbol.

Advanced tab

As indicated.

Document Memo

Whatever you type into the Document Memo will appear in a text box whenever your cursor hovers over the Document Memo option.

Model Memo

Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created.

2-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Using ESP

Connect Menu

Autoconnect

Generally Autoconnect will be the quickest way that

ESP can get connected to a reader. Autoconnect will try connecting at the most common communications settings and step through the various settings until they match up with the host’s settings.

Connect

When you select Connect, you will need to manually select the communications settings from a popup dialog.

Configure Multidrop

To connect to the reader by Multidrop, you will need a multidrop concentrator such as the MS-5000 and the required power supplies and cabling to communicate with your scanner(s).

1. From the Communications drop down menu in ESP, select

Configure Multidrop

to bring up the Mul-

tidrop Settings dialog.

2. If necessary, change the default address to match the address of your multidropped scanner and click

OK

.

If the host serial port is not connected in ESP, you will see the following popup message:

ESP is not currently connected to the multidrop concentrator. Do you wish to establish a connection now?”

3. Click

Yes

.

You will see a Connection Settings dialog as shown on the next page.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

2-9

Connect Menu

4. Select the concentrator’s host port communications settings.

When you click Con-

nect, you will be connecting to your concentrator, which can then relay commands to the scanner whose address was set in the

Multidrop Settings dialog.

5. Click

Connect

.

6. You should see the CON-

NECTED message in green at the bottom of the window along with the scanner’s Multi-

drop address.

7.

Retrieve Scanner Settings

to upload scanner’s configuration. If upload fails, return to the Connection Set-

tings dialog and make the corrections.

8. Follow the same procedure for connecting other scanners to your multidrop network.

2-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Using ESP

View

View indicates the current view (with a dot before the item) and allows you to quickly move to other views which are also accessed by clicking the icons on the toolbars.

It also allows you to access the Barcode Dialog.

Barcode Dialog

In the Barcode Dialog you can create bar code symbols by directly typing in the text bar code text you want to appear in

Code 128 bar code symbols. This is a very useful tool for creating configuration symbols which allows you to configure your reader by reading the bar code symbols you print out. To configure the size, text and caption parameters, see

"Bar Code Options tab"

on page 2-8.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

2-11

Navigating in ESP

Navigating in ESP

To change reader settings, or to access the utilities or terminal window, click on the

App Mode

button.

To return to the Easy Mode, click on the

EZ Mode

button.

To make changes to a configuration setting in the menu trees:

1.

Left click

on the + to expand tree

2.

Double click

on parameter and click once in selection box to view options.

3. Place your cursor in the selection box, scroll down to the setting you want to change and

click

once on the setting.

4.

Left click

again on the open screen to complete the selection.

5.

Right click

on the open screen and select

Save to Reader

to implement the command in the reader.

2-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Using ESP

Send/Receive Options

To access

Receive

,

Save

and

Default

options, click the

Send/Recv

button: You can also access this selector by right-clicking in any of the configuration views.

Receiving

From the Send/Recv selector, select

Receive Reader Settings.

Caution

: Do not select this option if you do not want to upload the reader’s settings.

For example, if your ESP file has a number of custom settings that you want to maintain and download into the reader, these settings would be lost by choosing Yes.

This is useful if you want to receive (upload) the reader’s settings and save them as a computer file for later retrieval. For example, if your reader has settings that you do not want to change, choosing Yes would allow you to load those settings to ESP and save as an ESP file for later retrieval.

Receiving the reader’s settings will also assure that you will not be subsequently saving any unwanted changes that you or someone else previously made in ESP.

Saving

1.

Send, No Save

.

(same as

<A>

)

This saves ESP settings to current memory.

2.

Send and Save

.

(same as

<Z>

)

This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the reader for power-on.

3.

Send and Save as Customer Defaults.

(same as

<Zc>

)

(This option will be visible only if you had checked Enable ‘Send and Save as

Customer Defaults’ in ESP Preferences in the Options menu.)

Use this to save your own set of default settings that you can quickly retrieve with a

<Zrc>

command.

For more on defaulting and saving settings, see

"Defaulting/Saving/Resetting"

on

page A-16.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

2-13

Send/Receive Options

Defaulting

When you select Default Current... or Default all ESP... you are only defaulting the

ESP settings.

Advanced Options

Send Current View

This is the same as

Save to Reader, Send No Save

except that only the commands in the current menu tree are sent.

Send Current Command

This is the same as

Send

Current View

above, but only saves the command that is currently selected.

Add Exceptions

After you perform a

Receive from Reader

command

1

and you click on the

Add

Exception

option you may see a list of serial commands. These are serial commands that may be in your reader’s firmware, but not included or different from your current

ESP software.

You can edit these commands by double-clicking on them and changing as needed.

When exceptions are present, you can also access them from an

Exceptions

button that will appear on the Applications button bar.

It is important to note that these commands will be saved to your reader whenever you send a

Save to Reader

command or send an

<A>

or a

<Z>

command.

Also, if there is a corresponding ESP menu item, the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a

Receive from Reader

command.

2-14

1. From the Send/Recv button or right-clicking from within the tree menus.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

3

EZ Button

Chapter Contents

EZ Button by ESP .......................................................................................3-2

EZ Button by Serial Command....................................................................3-2

EZ Button Operation....................................................................................3-3

EZ Button Modes.........................................................................................3-4

EZ Button Options .......................................................................................3-6

This section includes instructions for setting up and using the EZ Button.

3-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

EZ Button by ESP

EZ Button by ESP

Click the button shown above to bring up the

I/O Parameters

menu

EZ Button by Serial Command

EZ Button Modes

EZ Button Options

EZ Button Auto Framing

EZ Button

<

K771,

position 1 mode[0...9],position 2 mode[0...9],position 3

mode[0...9]>

<

K770,

global status,default on power-on>

<

K773,

raster status,laser status>

3-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

EZ Button

EZ Button Operation

The MS-860 EZ Button provides a quick and easy way to perform routine tasks such as Read Rate test and

Calibration.

Defaults

In the default positions the following operations occur:

• Single Beep and green flash:

Starts a

Read Rate

test

• Two Beeps and green flashes:

Starts a

Calibration

• Three Beeps and green flashes:

Save for Power-on

Using the EZ Button

EZ

The EZ Button has three positions, selectable by the length of time that the button is held down as indicated by one, two, and three beeps and percentage

LEDs in succession.

For example, for three beeps, press and hold the EZ

Button. You will first hear a single beep and see the

20% LED turn ON. Continue to hold and you will hear two quick beeps and see the 40%

LED turn ON. Do not release until you hear three quick beeps or see the 60% LED turn

ON.

Programmable Beeps

Each beep condition (1, 2 or 3) can be programmed for any of 8 options as presented in

"EZ Button Modes"

on page 3-4.

Programmable Options

The EZ Button can also be programmed for alternative operations including restore factory defaults as well as a quick save feature for calibration results. (See

"EZ Button

Options"

on page 3-6.)

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

3-3

EZ Button Modes

EZ Button Modes

Usage:

Definition:

Useful for performing multiple, repetitive tasks at the work site.

Provides six user-selectable functions for each of the three EZ Button positions.

Serial Cmd:

<

K771,

position 1 mode[0...9],position 2 mode[0...9],position 3

mode[0...9]>

Defaults:

Options:

<

K771,1,2,3

> as highlighted in the table.

0 through 9 for each position, as shown in the table.

The positions are selected by the length of time the button is held. When you want to select position one, you press and hold the button until one beep along with a single green flash is emitted from the reader and the 20% LED turns ON.

To select position two, you continue to hold until you hear two short beeps and see two green flashes and the 40% LED turn ON.

Finally, to select position three, you continue to hold the button until you hear three short beeps and see three green flashes and the 60% LED turn ON.

For example, if you want to select the function for position three, you will hear one short beep, then two short beeps, and finally three short beeps and the 20%, 40%, and

60% LEDs turn ON in progression.

The following table lists the options for the three positions with the default positions highlighted:

EZ Button Options

Position 1

(1 beep and green flash)

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibration

3 = Save for Power-on

Position 2

(2 beeps and 3 green flashes)

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibration

3 = Save for Power-on

4 = Auto Framing

5 = Load New Master

6 = Sleep Mode

7, 8 = Unused

4 = Auto Framing

5 = Load New Master

6 = Sleep Mode

7, 8 = Unused

9 = Symbol Configuration 9 = Symbol Configuration

Position 3

(3 beeps and 3 green flashes)

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibration

3 = Save for Power-on

4 = Auto Framing

5 = Load New Master

6 = Sleep Mode

7, 8 = Unused

9 = Symbol Configuration

Disabled: When set to Disabled, the button position will have no function associated with it. The reader will still respond when the button position is reached.

Read Rate: Read rate will perform decodes/second and is the same as sending a

<C>

from the terminal. (See

"Read Rate"

on page 15-3.) To exit read rate mode, tap the

EZ Button once quickly.

3-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

EZ Button

Calibration: The calibration routine will be initiated (see

"Calibration Options"

on

page 4-6). To abort calibration, tap the EZ Button once quickly.

Save for Power-on: When when this button position is selected, all reader settings will be saved to non-volatile memory to be recalled when reader is powered-on the next time. This is the same as sending the

<Z>

in the terminal.

Auto Frame: Auto Framing will be initiated when this button position is selected. To abort auto-framing, press the EZ Button once quickly. Auto framing is a background routine that automatically adjusts the scan width to the length of a symbol. This procedure can also be accessed in a terminal view by the

<@>

command. (See

"EZ Button

Auto Framing"

on page 3-7 for options).

Load New Master: This allows the button to function the same as the New Master Pin command. The new master pin’s consecutive decode requirement holds true for this but-

ton position when this mode is selected. (See

"Sequence Step"

on page 11-11.)

Sleep Mode: If sleep mode is enabled, the EZ Button will shut off the mirror motor and laser. To exit sleep mode, tap the EZ Button once quickly.

Label Configuration: Enables label configuration mode when this button position is selected. To disable, simply tap the Configuration Button once quickly. In normal reading modes, it is required to read a special Code 128 label with a special codeword used by AIM to signify reader programming. When entering label configuration by the EZ

Button, the special Code 128 label is not required.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

3-5

EZ Button Options

EZ Button Options

The EZ Button provides a convenient way to perform programmable operations both globally and for each of the three programmable button positions.

The EZ Button has three positions, each of which can be user-programmed to perform a variety of functions.

Global Status of EZ Button

Definition:

Determines the basic function of the EZ Button.

Serial Cmd:

<

K770,global status

,default on power-on>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Trigger

3 = Unlatch Output

4 = Parameter Switch

Disabled

When selected, the EZ Button is disabled.

Enabled

When selected, the function of each button position can be determined by the EZ But-

ton Mode

<K771>

command.

Trigger

When selected, the EZ Button will act as a trigger for the reader. All other button operations will not be active. The trigger will operate the same way as an external trigger.

Trigger mode

External Level

External Edge

Operation

The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ Button is pressed, unless a timeout occurs and Timeout is enabled for End Of Read Cycle.

As with Level, Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated by pressing the

EZ Button, but unlike Level mode, the read cycle ends with a good read output, a timeout, or a new trigger.

Unlatch Output. When selected, will unlatch any outputs that have been latched via

"Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch on Input #1)"

on page 10-18.

Unlatch Outputs

Unlatch any outputs that have been latched via latch mode #1. See

<K81n>

commands.

3-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

EZ Button

Parameter Switch

Toggles between custom defaults and power on settings, as if

<Arc>

and

<Arp>

are received, respectively. Note that the button must be configured for “parameter switch” in both custom and power on settings in order to be able to toggle between the two.

Default on Power-on

Definition:

When enabled, if the EZ Button is held down during power-on, the reader will default to customer defaults and save for power-on. This is the same as sending a

<Zrc>

command.

Serial Cmd:

<

K770,

global status,

default on power-on

>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

EZ Button Auto Framing

Definition:

Configures the reader's Auto Framing process as initiated from the EZ

Button. Raster framing is performed first, followed by laser framing, as enabled. During the raster framing process, the scan line used depends on the “laser status”.

Raster Status

Definition:

When enabled, Raster Framing will be performed whenever a framing process is ordered.

Serial Cmd:

<

K773,raster status

,laser status>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Laser Status

Definition:

When enabled, Laser Framing will be performed whenever a framing process is ordered.

Serial Cmd:

<

K773,

raster status,

laser status

>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

3-7

EZ Button Options

3-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

4

Calibration

Chapter Contents

Calibration by ESP ......................................................................................4-2

Calibration by Serial Command...................................................................4-2

Calibration Overview ...................................................................................4-3

Calibrating a Symbol ...................................................................................4-4

Calibration Dialog ........................................................................................4-5

Calibration Options......................................................................................4-6

The purpose of calibration is to optimize certain reader settings to obtain the highest read rates in one or several symbol positions as required by the user’s application.

This section includes the overall steps in calibration and specific steps for calibration by ESP, serial command, and embedded menus. For most applications, calibration is the only optical setup required. This section also includes an explanation of

Auto

Frame

commands, the routine for constraining the width of the scan beam.

4-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Calibration by ESP

Calibration by ESP

Click this Button to bring up the

Calibration

menu

Calibration by Serial Command

Calibration Options

Calibration Options

<

K521,

raster options,video status,scan speed status,laser power status,laser framing status,symbology detect>

4-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Calibration

Calibration Overview

When a

Calibrate

command is sent, all symbologies are enabled except PDF417

1

and

Pharmacode.

2

The reader looks for readable bar code symbols, and records the highest read rates it encounters while stepping through various settings. Any new symbologies decoded during calibration are enabled at the end of calibration. However, no previously enabled symbologies are disabled.

The settings that the calibration routine uses can be pre-set by the user and include the following:

Calibrates for:

Symbol position in the raster pattern

Video (gain and tracking)

Scan speed (scans per second)

Laser power (attempt minimum power)

Laser framing (shortens scan line to fit symbol)

Default Status

Searches for symbol but does NOT save to NOVRAM

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

The calibration settings can be changed by application requirements. See

"Calibration

Options"

on page 4-6 for details.

Calibration Methods

There are four ways to start calibration:

• The EZ Button.

ESP

Calibration

menu.

• Serial command

<@CAL>

.

• From embedded calibration menu

<@>

(see

"Embedded Menus"

on page A-24).

Configuration Database

When a symbol is calibrated, the resulting settings are automatically loaded into the

Current

index of the configuration database. From here it can be copied into any of the active database indexes and the indexes are compiled in the configuration database are applied in real time operations. See Chapter 5,

"Configuration Database"

.

1. Calibration does not function with PDF417 symbols. However, you can substitute a Code 128 symbol with the same mil size as your PDF417. When you do this, enable Code 128 and after calibration, switch back to PDF417.

2. Note: If using an I 2 of 5 symbol, verify that the number of characters in the symbol being scanned matches the code length enabled for the I 2 of 5 code type (default is 10 and 6). See

"Interleaved 2 of 5"

on page 9-11.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

4-3

Calibrating a Symbol

Calibrating a Symbol

1. Position symbol so that the raster scan lines are evenly spread above and below the symbol and will be parallel with the symbol length as shown in the illustration.

2. Enable those settings required for your specific application.

3. Start the calibration procedure.

(See

"Calibration Methods"

on page 4-3.)

If in the default Search mode (

"Raster

Options"

on page 4-6), the raster pattern will change to a single line, move to its topmost position, and sweep slowly down until it

Calibration Setup

finds a symbol.

If no symbol is found, the raster will go to a straight line, centered on its raster sweep.

Calibration Start Symbol Found

4-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Calibration

Calibration Dialog

1. In App Mode , click the

Calibration

button on the icon bar at the top of ESP to open the calibration menu.

2. In the

Fixed Parameter Calibration

area you can select one or more parameters that you do NOT want to change.

3. Wait for the calibration to cycle through the various settings looking for the best combination. A “Calibration Successful” message should eventually appear.

4. Click

Save

to save for power-on (same as a

<Z>

command).

Use the

Test

button to start a read rate test

Start the calibration procedure by clicking the

Calibrate

button

Choose between

Raster Framing and Laser Framing

These are the parameters that can be adjusted during the calibration procedure

Start Raster or Laser framing procedure

Click

Save

to save for power-on

Click

Stop

to end

Test or Calibration

Calibration Display

If checked, the associated parameter(s) will not change during calibration

See

"Raster

Options"

on page 4-6.

Reset parameters in this group

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

4-5

Calibration Options

Calibration Options

Before starting the calibration routine, you can make changes to the parameters that will be included in the process. If you make no changes, calibration will use the default parameters as described in this section.

Note: The changes made in this section will only apply to EZ Button,

<@>

, and

<@CAL>

defaults.

Raster Options

Definition:

Configures the raster position that will be used during the calibration process and determines whether raster framing is performed.

Serial Cmd:

<

K521,raster options

,video status,scan speed status,laser power status,laser framing status,symbology detect>

Default:

Search

Options:

0 = As Is

1 = Frame

2 = Search

3 = Straight

As Is

Usage:

Definition:

Useful when the raster pattern has already been aligned to the symbol.

Raster position does not change during calibration. Raster will continue to operate as per the raster command

<K506>

.

Frame

Definition:

Similar to “Search” setting, except at the end of calibration, the raster is swept through its full range of motion again, and the top and bottom location of the first symbol found are used to update the raster's top and bottom offset novram configuration. Also, the resulting configuration parameters are saved to the raster novram.

Search

Definition:

At the beginning of calibration, the raster sweeps through its entire range of motion in an attempt to find a symbol. When found, the scan line is placed in the middle of the symbol and held as a straight line for the remainder of the calibration process. If no symbol is found, the scan line will be placed straight line and centered straight out of the window for the remainder of the calibration process.

4-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Calibration

Straight

Definition:

The scan line is set as a centered straight line during calibration. This is equivalent to Top Position = Bottom Position = 127 in the raster command

<K506,,127,127>

.

No permanent change is made to the raster novram configuration parameters.

Video Status

Definition:

Video status includes both Gain and Tracking.

When checked, Gain and Tracking settings are fixed and is not calibrated.

When unchecked, they become part of the calibration procedure.

Serial Cmd:

<

K521,

raster options,

video status

,scan speed status,laser power status,laser framing status,symbology detect>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Scan Speed Status

Definition:

When checked, Scan Speed is fixed and is not calibrated.

When unchecked, it becomes part of the calibration procedure.

Serial Cmd:

<

K521,

raster options,video status,

scan speed status

,laser power status,laser framing status,symbology detect>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Do not calibrate motor speed if using the calibration database.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

4-7

Calibration Options

Laser Power Status

Definition:

When checked, Laser Power is not changed by calibration.

Laser power is minimized during the calibration process.

When not checked, laser power becomes part of the calibration process.

Serial Cmd:

<

K521,

raster options,video status,scan speed status,

laser power status

,laser framing status,symbology detect>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Laser Framing Status

Note: See

"Laser Setup"

on page 8-6 for the current laser settings.

Definition:

When enabled, laser framing is performed during calibration.

Serial Cmd:

<

K521,

raster options,video status,scan speed status,laser power status,

laser framing status

,symbology detect>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Disabled

If Laser Framing Status is disabled, the laser scan line is not changed and will continue to operate per the Laser Setup

<K700>

settings (

"Laser Setup"

on page 7-22).

Enabled

If Laser Framing Status is enabled and the beginning and end of the symbol are located during calibration, the

<K700>

Laser Setup parameters are changed as follows:

1. The On Position and Off Position parameters for the beginning and end of the symbol are updated.

2. Laser Framing is set to

Enabled

.

If a symbol is not located, the

<K700>

Laser Setup parameters will not be changed.

4-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Calibration

Symbology Detect

Definition:

When enabled, autodiscrimination is in effect during the calibration process.

When disabled, only the current symbologies enabled will be considered during the calibration process.

Serial Cmd:

<

K521,

raster options,video status,scan speed status,laser power status,laser framing status,

symbology detect

>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disable 1 = Enabled

When enabled, all symbologies readable by the MS-860 except PDF417 and Pharmacode will be attempted during calibration. Any new symbologies successfully decoded during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process. All enabled symbologies will remain enabled. For example, assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration and Symbology Detect is enabled. If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration, then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will thereafter be enabled.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

4-9

Calibration Options

4-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

5

Configuration

Database

Chapter Contents

Configuration by ESP ..................................................................................5-2

Configuration by Serial Command...............................................................5-2

Overview of Configuration Database...........................................................5-2

Setup for Configuration Database ...............................................................5-3

Operation of Database ................................................................................5-4

Save Current Settings to Database.............................................................5-7

Load Current Settings from Database.........................................................5-7

This section explains how to set up and use database indexes.

5-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Overview of Configuration Database

Configuration by ESP

Click this Button to bring up the

Calibration

menu.

Then Click on the

Configuration Database

tab.

Configuration by Serial Command

Configuration Database Control

Database Setup

<

K253,

index,gain,AGC mode,tracking,raster top,raster bottom,raster speed,laser framing status,laser on position,laser off position,laser

power,background color>

<

K252,

number of active indexes,database cycles> Database Operation

Database Mode

Save Current to Database

<

<

K254,

mode,count/time>

K253+,

database index>

Load Current from Database <

K253-,

database index>

Overview of Configuration Database

Definition:

Usage:

Up to 10 configuration database indexes can be set up either manually or derived in part from calibration results as explained in Chapter 4,

"Calibration".

When enabled, these settings will be applied sequentially and repeatedly during the read cycle.

Useful in applications in which a variety of symbol conditions require different settings that can be applied in real time. For example, a package with a Code 39 and Code 128 symbol appearing consistently in different locations as they move through the scan range during a read cycle can be read by the reader if the proper settings are in the active configuration database.

5-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Configuration Database

Setup for Configuration Database

Definition:

When setting up the configuration database, for each index number (1 to

10) the values for 11 parameters can be defined applied during the read

cycle as enabled by

"Number of Active Indexes"

on page 5-4.

Serial Cmd:

<

K253,index

,gain,AGC mode,tracking,raster top,raster bottom,raster speed,laser framing status,laser on position,laser off position,laser

power,background color>

Default:

Options:

0

(Index)

1 to 10 indexes, 0 = disabled

When setting up the database, the following parameters can be changed:

Gain

Parameter

AGC mode

Tracking

Raster Top

Raster Bottom

Raster Speed

Laser Framing Status

Laser On Position

Laser Off Position

Laser Power

Background Color

Also in

Calibration?

a

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Reference

See

<K504>

,

"Gain Level"

on page 7-17

See

<K504>

,

"Automatic Gain Control (AGC)"

on page 7-19

See

See

See

<K520>

<K506>

<K451>

,

,

,

"Tracking"

on page 7-17

"Top Offset"

on page 8-4

See

<K506>

,

"Bottom Offset"

on page 8-4

See

<K506>

,

"Raster Sweep Rate"

on page 8-5

See

<K700>

,

"Laser Framing"

on page 8-7

See

<K700>

,

"Laser On Position"

on page 8-8

See

<K700>

,

"Laser Off Position"

on page 8-8

See

<K700>

,

"Laser Power"

on page 8-8

"Background Color"

on page 9-31

a. It is important to note that the above settings are not identical to the settings changed by the calibration routine described in Chapter 4, “Calibration.”

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

5-3

Operation of Database

Operation of Database

Once Configuration Database is enabled (by setting the Number of Active Indexes to any number other than 0) the reader’s current settings for Gain, AGC Mode, Track-

ing, Raster Top, Raster Bottom, Raster Speed, Laser Framing Status, Laser On

Position, Laser Off Position, Laser Power and Background Color will no longer impact reader operation. For those parameters, only settings that are in the database and enabled will be used during the normal read cycle.

Number of Active Indexes

Definition:

Number of data base records (groups of settings) that will be used automatically during the read cycle. If set to 0, the reader only uses the current settings, not database entry settings.

Serial Cmd:

<

K252,number of active indexes

,database cycles>

Default:

0

(0 = disabled)

Options:

0 to 10 indexes

Database Cycles

Definition:

The number of times the database will be repeated (cycled).

Serial Cmd:

<

K252,

number of active indexes,

database cycles

>

Default:

Options:

0

0 to 255

When set to 0, the reader will repeatedly cycle through all active database indexes until the read cycle ends. When set to any number greater than 0, the reader will only cycle the active database entries the defined number of times before adopting the settings from the last active index for the remainder of the read cycle.

Note: It is possible for the read cycle to end before the reader is able to cycle trough all data base entries.

Note: When the reader is in Continuous Read and Continuous Read 1 and not in

Read Rate, it will only use current settings, not database entry settings. However, the user may still send the

<K253-,n>

command to load current settings from the database.

5-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Configuration Database

Database Mode

Definition:

Selects the event that causes the reader to load the next entry from the database to current, active settings.

Serial Cmd:

<

K254,mode

,count/time>

Default:

0

Options:

0 = Time 1 = Number of Raster Sweeps

Count/Time

Definition:

Number of times the reader will load the series of active entries.

Serial Cmd:

<

K254,

mode,

count/time

>

Default:

10

Options:

1 to 65535

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

5-5

Operation of Database

Configuration Database Window

In ESP, when you click on the Database tab you will see the following:

Click

once to select the index row;

Double-click

popup dialog

on any row to make specific changes in

Configuration parameters (all)

Setting to any number other than zero will enable

(same as

<K252>

)

Number of times all indexes in the database are attempted before accepting the last index

Loads the selected index to current

Loads the Current settings to selected index

Time or number of raster sweeps before switching to the next index

Time or number of raster sweeps to sequence indexes

Saves database to reader memory

Receives database settings from the reader

Changes to settings in the

Current

row are dynamically updated in the reader and ESP settings

From ESP, you enable Database by setting Number of Active Database Indexes to any number other than zero. The number chosen will cause that number of indexes in the database above to turn blue.

You can make changes to any setting in any row simply by double-clicking and changing the resulting popup dialog.

5-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Save Current Settings to Database

Configuration Database

You can change current settings in ESP by making changes in the Current row of the database or by making changes in the tree commands to the left of the database.

Saves settings currently enabled to the designated database index.

Serial Cmd:

<

K253+,

database index>

Load Current Settings from Database

Loads selected database index settings into current reader settings.

Serial Cmd:

<

K253-,

database index>

Example: <

K253-,5

> loads settings from database index # 5.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

5-7

Load Current Settings from Database

5-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

6

Communications

Chapter Contents

Communications by ESP.............................................................................6-2

Communications by Serial Command .........................................................6-2

RS-232/422 Host Port .................................................................................6-3

RS-232 Auxiliary Port ..................................................................................6-8

Auxiliary Port System Data........................................................................6-18

Preamble ...................................................................................................6-19

Postamble .................................................................................................6-20

LRC Status ................................................................................................6-21

Response Timeout ....................................................................................6-22

With the ESP™ (Easy Setup Program), configuration changes can be made in the ESP menus, then sent and saved to your reader. The user can also send serial commands to the reader via the ESP’s Terminal window.

This section includes connecting parameters and options for communicating by the auxiliary port and various interfaces.

Note: When assigning characters in user-defined fields, the characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

,

Note: Default settings for establishing communications are:

Baud =

Parity =

Stop Bits =

Data Bits =

9600

Even

One

Seven

Flow Control =

None

6-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications by ESP

Click

this button to bring up the

Communications

menu.

To open nested options,

single-click

the +.

To change a setting,

double-click

the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options.

Communications by Serial Command

Host Port Connections

Host Protocol

Auxiliary Port

Communications

<

K100,

baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>

<

K140,

protocol>

<

K101,

aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

status,daisy chain ID>

Daisy Chain Auto Configure

Daisy Chain Scanner ID

<

K150DAISY

>

<

K151,

daisy chain scanner,daisy chain scanner ID>

Auxiliary Port System Status <

K146,

aux status>

Preamble <

K141,

status,preamble>

Postamble <

K142,

status,postamble>

LRC <

K145,

status>

Response Timeout <

K143,

timeout>

6-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

RS-232/422 Host Port

Includes host port connections and host protocols.

Host Port Connections

Baud Rate, Host Port

Usage:

Definition:

Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings.

The rate at which the reader and host transfer data back and forth.

Serial Cmd:

<

K100,baud rate

,parity,stop bits,data bits>

Default:

9600

Options:

0 = 600

1 = 1200

2 = 2400

3 = 4800

4 = 9600

5 = 19.2K

6 = 38.4K

7 = 57.6K

8 = 115.2K

Parity, Host Port

Usage:

Definition:

Only changed if necessary to match host setting.

An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to

1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd.

Serial Cmd:

<

K100,

baud rate,

parity

,stop bits,data bits>

Default:

Even

Options:

0 = None 1 = Even 2 = Odd

Stop Bits, Host Port

Usage:

Definition:

Only changed if necessary to match host setting.

One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character.

Serial Cmd:

<

K100,

baud rate,parity,

stop bits

,data bits>

Default:

One

Options:

0 = One 1 = Two

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-3

RS-232/422 Host Port

Data Bits, Host Port

Usage:

Definition:

Only changed if necessary to match host setting.

Number of bits in each character.

Serial Cmd:

<

K100,

baud rate,parity,stop bits,

data bits

>

Default:

Seven

Options:

0 = Seven 1 = Eight

Host Protocol

Usage:

Definition:

In general, the point-to-point protocols will work well in most applications. They require no address and must use RS-232 or RS-422 communications standards.

Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the reader and the host, or in the case of Multidrop, between readers and a concentrator.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,

protocol>

Default:

Point-to-Point

Options:

0 = Point-to-Point

1 = Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS

2 = Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF

3 = Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS &

XON/XOFF

4 = Polling Mode D

5 = Multidrop

6 = User Defined

7 = User Defined Multidrop

If selecting one of the options from 0 to 4 (Point-to-Point, Point-to-

Point with RTS/CTS, Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF, Point-to-

Point with RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF, or Polling Mode D), use the

<

K140,

protocol> format.

Options 5 through 7 are special cases and are discussed later in this section.

Point-to-Point (standard)

Usage:

Used only with RS-232 or RS-422.

Definition:

Standard Point-to-Point requires no address and sends data to the host whenever it is available, without any request or handshake from the host.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,0

>

6-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS

Usage:

A reader initiates a data transfer with an RTS (request-to-send) transmission. The host, when ready, responds with a CTS (clear-to-send) and the data is transmitted. CTS and RTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS-232 standard.

Used only with RS-232.

Definition:

Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS (request-to-send/clear-to-send) is a simple hardware handshaking protocol that allows a reader to initiate data transfers to the host.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,1

>

Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF

Usage:

If an XOFF has been received from the host, data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON. During the XOFF phase, the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices.

Definition:

Used only with RS-232.

This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start (^Q) or stop (^S).

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,2

>

Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS & XON/XOFF

Usage:

Definition:

Used only with RS-232.

This option is a combination of Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS and

Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,3

>

Polling Mode D

Usage:

Definition:

When in Polling Mode D, an address of 1 is automatically displayed on the configuration screen. However, during transmission, a 1C hex poll address (FS) and a 1D hex select address (GS) are substituted for the 1.

Like Point-to-Point, Polling Mode D requires a dedicated connection to the host; but unlike Point-to-Point, it requires an address and must wait for a poll from the host before sending data.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,4

>

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-5

RS-232/422 Host Port

Multidrop

See also MS-860 Quick Start Help for Multidrop setup.

See also

"Multidrop Communications"

on page A-26.

Usage:

Definition:

The MS-5000 can be used as a concentrator to a single host port connection.

Multidrop allows up to 50 devices to be connected to a single RS-485 host, with the reader assigned an unique address (from 01 to 50). When

Multidrop is selected, the protocol characters for RES, REQ, etc. are assigned automatically.

Multidrop

Addresses:

Each address has its own separate poll and select address (from 1C to 7F hex).

Serial Cmd:

If selecting Multidrop

<K140,5>

an address must be defined and appended to the command string.

Options:

Format: <

K140,5

,address[01 to 50]>

01 through 50

Note: Readers linking up to a Microscan MS-5000 multidrop concentrator must be configured in standard multidrop protocol.

User Defined Point-to-Point

Usage:

Definition:

Used for developing custom protocols in polled or unpolled mode.

User Defined Point-to-Point allows the user to customize the point-topoint protocol.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,6

,RES,address,REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK>

User Defined Address

Definition:

User Defined is considered to be in a polled mode only if an address has been assigned.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,6

,RES,

address

,REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK>

Default:

No address

Options:

Any ASCII character except a null.

6-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

User Defined Example

Example:

An ACK/NAK protocol can be configured using User Defined. The reader will transmit data to the host when an ACK is received. If a NAK or response timeout occurs, the reader will re-send the data to the host up to 3 more times before aborting.

Tip: To use User Defined Point-to-Point, first select Point-to-Point

<K140,0>

and then User Defined

<K140,6>

.

Example: To select an unpolled ACK/NAK User Defined protocol with

LRC disabled, send

<K140,0><K140,6,,,,,,,^F,^U><K145,0>

. ACK and NAK will be displayed in the menu.

Tip: To use User Defined Point-to-Point, first select Point-to-Point

<K140,0>

and then User Defined

<K140,6>

.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,6

,RES,address,

REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK

>

Default:

No assignment

Options:

Any ASCII character except a null. Control characters can be used to define RES through NAK in serial commands.

User Defined Multidrop

Note: Any ASCII character except a null (00) and a ^A (01) can be assigned as an address. Control characters can be used to define RES through NAK in serial com-

mands. (See

"Communication Protocol Commands"

on page A-15.)

Usage:

Definition:

Used when connecting to a concentrator or other device that does not match standard multidrop protocol.

User Defined Multidrop allows the user to customize the polling protocol.

If selecting User Defined Multidrop (7), complete the format by either choosing new parameters or place commas where unchanged data fields occur.

Serial Cmd:

<

K140,7

,RES,address,REQ,EOT,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK>

For User Defined Multidrop, first select Multidrop

<K140,F140,5>

, then User Defined Multidrop

<K140,140,F7...>

.

Address:

Any single character (02 hex to 7E hex) in the ASCII table can be assigned as the address character. The character chosen is used as the poll character and the subsequent ASCII character becomes the select character. For example, if a ^B (02 hex) is selected as the address, ^C

(03 hex) becomes the select address that the host will use in sending host select commands.

Note: Definitions of commands in User Defined and User Defined Multidrop must be duplicated in host applications to enable poll and select sequences to execute correctly during transmission.

Note: Typically, parameters in User Defined Multidrop are defined by first enabling

Multidrop, then enabling User Defined Multidrop. This pre-loads multidrop characters into the parameters. Then changes are made to individual characters to match the host or other requirements.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-7

RS-232 Auxiliary Port

RS-232 Auxiliary Port

Note: The aux port cannot be used with RTS/CTS.

As with the host port parameters, the auxiliary terminal’s settings (baud rate, parity, stop bits, and data bits) must be identical with those of the auxiliary device.

Usage:

Definition:

These commands set the communication parameters with the auxiliary port which can be used to configure menus, send data to the host, display data transmissions originating from the host of the reader, and relay data from other readers set in tandem (daisy chained). If the reader’s host port needs to be dedicated to the host, but configuration must be done on the fly, the auxiliary port can be set to accept configuration changes by Command Processing Mode (see

"Command Processing

Mode"

on page 6-14).

An auxiliary port connects the reader to a remote display or to other readers that can display or transfer data.

Aux Port Connections

As with the host port parameters, the auxiliary terminal’s settings (baud rate, parity, stop bits, and data bits) must be identical with those of the auxiliary device.

Baud Rate, Aux Port

Usage:

Definition:

Can be used to transfer data faster or match an auxiliary device.

The rate at which the reader and host transfer data back and forth.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

aux port mode,

baud rate

,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

Default:

9600

Options:

0 = 600

1 = 1200

2 = 2400

3 = 4800

4 = 9600

5 = 19.2K

6 = 38.4K

7 = 57.6K

8 = 115.2K

Parity, Aux Port

Usage:

Definition:

Only changed if necessary to match host setting.

An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to

1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

aux port mode,baud rate,

parity

,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

Default:

Even

Options:

0 = None 1 = Even 2 = Odd

6-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

Stop Bits, Aux Port

Usage:

Definition:

Only changed if necessary to match host setting.

Allows the user to select the last one or two bits in each character to indicate the end of the character.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

aux port mode,baud rate,parity,

stop bits

,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

Default:

One

Options:

0 = One 1 = Two

Data Bits, Aux Port

Usage:

Definition:

Only changed if necessary to match host setting.

Number of bits in each character.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,

data bits

,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

Default:

Seven

Options:

0 = Seven 1 = Eight

Aux Port Mode

Definition:

Determines the flow of data between the auxiliary port device(s), the reader, and the host.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,aux port mode

,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Transparent

2 = Half duplex

3 = Full duplex

4 = Daisy chain

5 = Command Processing

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-9

RS-232 Auxiliary Port

Transparent Mode

Usage:

Definition:

Often used in conjunction with handheld readers. Employs an auxiliary readout to detect mis-applied bar code symbols.

In Transparent mode data is passed between the auxiliary port and the host. The reader buffers data from the auxiliary port and echoes the keyed data on the auxiliary port. I

Data initiated from the Auxiliary Port

• Auxiliary port data is passed through to the host whenever a return key is pressed at the auxiliary port or symbol data is sent.

• Whenever aux port data is sent with symbol data, the aux port data will appear between the preamble and the symbol data.

Host

Aux

Port

• Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent with a preamble and a postamble.

• If the reader is in a polled mode to the host, auxiliary port data will still pass through.

Reader

Data initiated from the Reader

• Transmission to the auxiliary port occurs immediately upon a good read.

• Scan data to the auxiliary port does not include a preamble or a postamble.

• Communications with the auxiliary port is always in Point-to-Point protocol, even if the host is in a polled protocol mode.

Data initiated from the Host

• All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled and polled mode.

Host

Host

Reader

Aux

Port

Aux

Port

Reader

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,aux port mode

,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

1 = Transparent

6-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

Half Duplex Mode

Usage:

Definition:

Used to display symbol data on an auxiliary screen close to the reader.

In Half Duplex mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host. Symbol data is displayed on the auxiliary port screen at the same time the data is sent to the host.

Data initiated from the Auxiliary Port

• Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the reader is in a polled mode.

• Auxiliary port data or scanned data is sent to the host whenever it is received.

• Auxiliary port data is not echoed.

• Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent without a preamble or a postamble.

Data initiated from the Reader

• Scan data is transmitted to the auxiliary port at the same time it is transmitted to the host.

• Data transmission conforms with all parameters specified in the configuration menu (e.g., Pre-

amble, Postamble, End of Read Cycle).

Host

Host

Reader

Aux

Port

Aux

Port

Reader

Data initiated from the Host

• All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode.

Host

Aux

Port

Reader

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,aux port mode

,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

2 = Half Duplex

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-11

RS-232 Auxiliary Port

Full Duplex Mode

Usage:

Definition:

Used when communication to and from the auxiliary port is required.

In Full Duplex mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host. Symbol data is not displayed on the auxiliary port screen.

Data initiated from the Auxiliary Port

• Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the reader is in a polled mode.

• Auxiliary port data or scanned data is sent to the host whenever it is received.

• Auxiliary port data is not echoed.

• Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent without a preamble or a postamble.

Data initiated from the Reader

• Scan data is not sent to the auxiliary port.

Host

Host

Reader

Aux

Port

Aux

Port

Reader

Data initiated from the Host

All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode.

Host

Aux

Port

Reader

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,aux port mode

,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

3 = Full duplex

6-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

Daisy Chain Mode

Usage:

Definition:

Used in applications where:

• A symbol might be scanned in both ladder and picket fence directions.

• A bar code symbol may be present on multiple sides of a package.

• Bar code symbols are presented at different depths.

In a daisy chain application, readers are connected in tandem or “daisy chain” and decoded data is relayed from one reader to another on up to the host.

A master reader has its host port linked to the host computer and its auxiliary port linked to the host port of the first secondary reader in the chain. Thereafter, each secondary’s auxiliary port is linked to the host port of the secondary that is further from the host in the daisy chain.

Each reader in the daisy chain can be assigned an ID that accompanies any data that it sends.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,aux port mode

,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

Options:

Function:

4 = Daisy chain

Before the master reader times out, it checks its auxiliary port for data. It should be set to wait at least

20

mS for each secondary in the daisy

chain. (See

"Read Cycle Timeout"

on page 7-15.) If no data is received within the read cycle timeout, the master sends a noread message to the host. Otherwise the complete data is sent.

If for example the master reader is set to timeout in 120mS, the first secondary reader downstream might be set to 100mS, the next to 80mS, and so forth, thus assuring that at least 20mS elapses between transmissions.

a

Daisy-chained readers can send a series of symbols by enabling Multi-

symbol and a common multisymbol separator. If the master reader does not receive the expected number of symbols, noread messages are appended to the data string to make up the difference between the number of symbols enabled in Multisymbol and the number of symbols read.

For example, a master and two secondary readers have Number of

Symbols set to 3 and Multisymbol Separator defined as %. If the master and the first secondary reader do not find symbols, but the next secondary reader registers a good read, the transmitted results would be: symbol data % noread % noread.

a. The above example is based on the best case. Other factors such as baud rate, dynamic focus timing, number of characters in a given symbol, and the number of secondaries in the daisy chain can affect timing and may need to be included in your calculations for complete accuracy.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-13

RS-232 Auxiliary Port

Conditions:

The conditions for a daisy chain application are as follows:

Host Secondary

1. The master reader’s trigger must be Serial or

External; the secondary readers’ triggers are configured for Serial.

2. All readers are enabled to Daisy Chain mode.

Master

3. Each reader’s auxiliary port must be connected to the Host port of its secondary reader.

4. Each secondary reader in the daisy chain must be set to send its data no less than

20

mS before its preceding reader.

5. All but the master reader must have Postamble enabled and set to

CR (^M) only.

6. All but the master reader must have their noread messages disabled.

7. If Multisymbol is enabled, Multisymbol Separator characters must match in all readers and Number of Symbols must be set to number large enough to include all the symbols it may itself read plus the number of symbols that it will be expected to relay to the host or the next reader up the line.

8. Symbology ID enable/disable must be the same in all readers.

9. All but the master reader must have their diagnostic warning messages disabled.

10. Daisy Chain ID Status enable/disable and the number of characters in Daisy Chain ID must be the same in all readers.

Command Processing Mode

Usage:

Definition:

Allows user to send configuration from the Host port or the AUX port.

When enabled, Command Processing allows commands to be entered via the aux port. The following rules apply:

1. Bar code data, including the serial trigger if used, will be transmitted to the last port from which a command was sent.

2. If a reset occurs, all data will be transmitted to the host port.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,aux port mode

,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

ID status,daisy chain ID>

Options:

5 = Command Processing

6-14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

Daisy Chain ID Status

Note: Enable/disable and length must be the same in all readers.

Usage:

Definition:

Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader in a daisy chain setup sent the data.

Each reader in a daisy chain can be assigned a one or two character ID that will appear in front of decoded data and identify its source.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,

daisy chain

ID status

,daisy chain ID>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Daisy Chain ID

Note: All secondary readers must be set to Serial for Daisy Chain to function.

See

"Trigger"

on page 7-6.

Usage:

Definition:

Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader sent the data.

A one or two character prefix which identifies the particular daisy chain reader from which the data is being sent.

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain ID status,

daisy chain ID

>

Default:

Options:

1/

Any one or two ASCII characters.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-15

RS-232 Auxiliary Port

Daisy Chain Autoconfigure

Note: Not in ESP.

Usage:

Definition:

For quick setup and configuration of the daisy chain network.

Daisy Chain Autoconfigure is issued to the master reader in the daisy chain and the software responds as follows:

• Counts the number of secondary readers in the daisy chain.

• Assigns an internal ID number (1...n) to each secondary reader, where the first secondary reader is number 1 (and it’s own ID being a 0).

• Propagates the communications settings and the relevant operating modes of the master reader to the host and auxiliary ports of each secondary reader.

• Resets each secondary reader.

• Verifies that each secondary reader has acquired the new settings.

Serial Cmd:

<

K150DAISY

>

Note: All secondary readers must be set to Serial for Daisy Chain to function.

See

"Trigger"

on page 7-6.

When setting up a daisy chain operation, do the following:

1. Set the master (the reader connected to the host) reader to Serial.

This sets all the readers in the daisy chain to Serial when the command is carried out.

Before Autoconfigure you must set the master reader to Serial (

S

):

Host

S

Master

Reader

S

Secondary

Reader

S

Secondary

Reader

2. Send

<K150DAISY>

command.

3. If necessary, set the master reader to Edge.

After Autoconfigure you may set the master reader to Edge (

E

) but the other readers must remain in Serial (

S

):

Host

E

Master

Reader

S

Secondary

Reader

S

Secondary

Reader

6-16

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

Daisy Chain Remote Secondary ID

Note: Not in ESP.

Usage:

Definition:

This command provides a handy way to assign custom daisy chain IDs to specific readers that were assigned during the daisy chain autoconfigure process.

Assigns a new daisy chain ID to a daisy chain secondary reader. The command is sent to the master reader to configure the other secondary readers.

Daisy Chain Reader Number

Definition:

Specifies the target reader (by sequential number) which will be receiving the new Daisy Chain ID. The master reader is always 0 (zero). All secondary readers are numbered 1...n in the order that they are connected.

Note: These numbers are for assigning IDs only and are not changeable.

Serial Cmd:

<

K151,daisy chain reader #

,daisy chain reader ID>

Options:

1....n (0 for the master reader)

Daisy Chain Reader ID

Definition:

A two-character user-defined ASCII message identifying a reader in the daisy chain.

Serial Cmd:

<

K151,

daisy chain reader #,

daisy chain reader ID

>

Default:

Sequential numbering of reader units resulting from the Daisy Chain

Auto-configure

<K150DAISY>

command; for example: ID Master =

1/

;

ID Reader 1 =

2/

; ID Reader 2 =

3/

; etc.

Options:

Any two characters except

NULL < ,

or

>

.

Note: After a secondary reader accepts a new ID, it automatically invokes a reset-withsave command.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-17

Auxiliary Port System Data

Auxiliary Port System Data

Note: Do not use this with Daisy Chain operation.

Auxiliary Port System Status

Note: This command only applies if Aux Mode is set to Command Processing.

See

"Command Processing Mode"

on page 6-14.

Usage:

Definition:

To check symbol data and error messages via the aux port.

When enabled, system data, including decoded data and diagnostic warning messages, will be routed to the aux port.

Serial Cmd:

<

K146,aux status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

6-18

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

Preamble

Preamble Status

Usage:

Definition:

Used for identifying and controlling incoming data. For example, defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line.

Defines a one to four character data string that can be added to the front of the decoded data.

Serial Cmd:

<

K141,status

,preamble character(s)>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled (within any protocol)

Preamble Character(s)

Serial Cmd:

<

K141,

status,

preamble character(s)

>

Default:

CR

(^M) corresponds to:

carriage return/null/null/null

.

Options:

Up to four user-defined ASCII characters, including control characters.

Within a Serial Command

To enter control characters within a serial command, hold down the control key while typing the desired character.

Example:

<K141,1,CTRL-m>

to enter ^M

Within an Embedded Menu

Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters, such as:

<CR><NUL><NUL><NUL>

.

To enter a control character from within an embedded menu, first type in a space (with the space key). This has the effect of allowing the control key to be recognized as a part of the control character. Next hold down the control key while typing the desired character.

Example:

Space CTRL-m

to enter ^M.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-19

Postamble

Postamble

Postamble Status

Usage:

Definition:

Used for identifying and controlling incoming data. For example, defining the postamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line.

Defines a one to four character data string that can be added to the end of the decoded data.

Serial Cmd:

<

K142,status

,postamble character(s)>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled (within any protocol)

Postamble Character(s)

Serial Cmd:

<

K142,

status,

postamble character(s)

>

Default:

CR LF

(^M^J) Corresponds to carriage return/line feed/null/null, as displayed in the menu.

Options:

Up to four user-defined ASCII characters, including control characters.

Within a Serial Command

To enter control characters within a serial command, hold down the control key while typing the desired character.

Example:

<K142,1,CTRL-m CTRL-j>

to enter ^M^J.

Within an Embedded Menu

Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters, such as:

<CR><LF><NUL><NUL>

To enter a control character from within an embedded menu, first type in a space (with the space key). This has the effect of allowing the control key to be recognized as a part of the control character. Next hold down the control key while typing the desired character.

Example:

Space CTRL-m Space CTRL-j

to enter ^M^J.

6-20

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications

LRC Status

(Longitudinal Redundancy Check)

Usage:

Definition:

Used when extra data integrity is required.

An error-checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions. It is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX (start of text) up to and including the ETX (end of text). What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmissions are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 (two 1s = 0, two 0s = 0, a 1 and a 0 = 1). The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver connected to the host port performs the same addition and compares the results.

Serial Cmd:

<

K145,status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

6-21

Response Timeout

Response Timeout

Usage:

Definition:

Used only when a response is required from the host. While in Multi-

drop, if the reader does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data, it will act on a fault. The reader can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero.

Time the reader will wait before timing out if ACK, NAK, and ETX are enabled, and a host response is expected.

Serial Cmd:

<

K143,response timeout

>

Default:

2

(x 10 = 20 mS)

Options:

0 to 255 in 10mS increments (0 to 2.55 seconds)

(A zero (0) setting causes an indefinite wait.)

6-22

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

7

Read Cycle

Chapter Contents

Read Cycle by ESP .....................................................................................7-2

Read Cycle by Serial Command .................................................................7-3

Multisymbol .................................................................................................7-4

Trigger .........................................................................................................7-6

Serial Trigger.............................................................................................7-12

End of Read Cycle ....................................................................................7-14

Decodes Before Output.............................................................................7-16

Reader Setup ............................................................................................7-17

Laser Setup ...............................................................................................7-22

Raster Setup .............................................................................................7-22

After you’ve established communications and completed basic read rate testing, you will need to address the spatial and timing parameters associated with your application.

In a typical operation a bar coded item moves along a line past a reader. A trigger or timer activates a read cycle during which the reader actively searches for symbols. You will need to decide how to initiate the read cycle and how and when to end it.

Note: When assigning characters in user-defined fields, the characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

Note: You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number, as in

<K100?>

. To see all “

K

” commands, send

<K?>

.

Note on Serial Commands: To preserve continuity with other Microscan products, some serial configuration commands may include 0s (zeros) or 1s as placeholders. In order for a these commands to be implemented, the parameter values or a comma must be included.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-1

Read Cycle by ESP

Read Cycle by ESP

Click this button to bring up the

Read Cycle/Triggering

menu

To open nested options,

single-click

the +.

To change a setting,

double-click

the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options.

7-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

Read Cycle by Serial Command

Multisymbol

Trigger Mode

External Trigger State

Read Cycle

<

K222,

number of symbols,multisymbol separator>

<

K200,

trigger mode,trigger filter duration>

<

K202,

external trigger state>

Serial Trigger Character <

K201,

serial trigger character>

Start Serial Trigger Character <

K229,

start trigger character>

Stop Serial Trigger Character <

K230,

stop trigger character>

End of Read Cycle <

K220,

end of read cycle mode,read cycle timeout>

Decodes Before Output <

K221,

number before output,decodes before output mode>

Configuration Database Control

Database Setup

<

K253,

index,gain,AGC mode,tracking,raster top,raster bottom,raster speed,laser framing status,laser on position,laser off position,laser

power,background color>

<

K252,

number of active indexes,database cycles> Database Operation

Database Mode

Save Current to Database

<

K254,

mode,count/time>

<

K253+,

database index>

Load Current from Database <

K253-,

database index>

Reader Setup

Tracking

Scan Speed

Automatic Gain Control

Symbol Detect Status

Maximum Element

<

<

<

<

<

K520,

K500,

K504,

K505,

K502,

tracking>

scan speed>

gain level,AGC sampling,AGC min,AGC max>

symbol detect status,transition counter>

maximum element>

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-3

Multisymbol

Multisymbol

Usage:

Definition:

Conditions

Commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual bar codes for part number, quantity, etc. This feature allows one trigger to pick up all the symbols. AIAG and UCC/EAN-128 are two application standards that address this need.

Allows the user to set up conditions that will allow more than one symbol to be decoded and output.

The following conditions apply:

1. All noread messages are posted at the end of the data string.

2. If more than one symbol is within the scan beam at the same time, symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance.

3. If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to

Continuous Read 1 Output, Number of Symbols will default to

1 (if set to any number greater than 1).

4. The maximum number of characters in any one linear symbol is

128

.

5. The maximum number of output characters for all symbols is

3072

, including separators, and optimal formatting.

Number of Symbols

Usage:

Definition:

Commonly used where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number, quantity, etc. UCC/EAN-128 is an example of a symbology that address this need.

Number of Symbols allows the user to define up to 12 bar code symbols that can be read in a single read cycle.

Conditions:

The following conditions apply:

1. When Number of Symbols is set to Single, the read cycle ends when one symbol is decoded and output.

2. When Number of Symbols is set to Multiple, all decoded symbol data (for both the same and different symbols) are output while the read cycle is active and/or no timeout has occurred.

Serial Cmd:

<

K222,number of symbols

,multisymbol separator>

Default:

1

Options

1 to 12

7-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

Multisymbol Separator

Usage:

Definition:

ESP:

Used to separate decoded data from more than one symbol.

A user-defined character that’s inserted between each symbol scanned when Multisymbol is set to any number greater than 1.

To select a new multisymbol separator, double-click on

Separator

and select a character in the popup window.

Serial Cmd:

<

K222,

number of symbols,

multisymbol separator

>

Note: If Multisymbol Separator has been changed to any character other than the default comma and you wish to re-define the separator as a comma, use ESP or the embedded menu.

Default:

Options:

,

(comma)

Any available ASCII character, except

<

,

>

, and

NUL

.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-5

Trigger

Trigger

Trigger Mode

Definition:

The type of trigger event that will initiate the read cycle.

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,trigger mode,

trigger filter duration>

Default:

Continuous Read

Options:

0 = Continuous Read

1 = Continuous Read 1 Output

2 = External Level

3 = External Edge

4 = Serial Data

5 = Serial Data & External Edge

Continuous Read

Usage:

Definition:

Continuous Read is useful in testing symbol readability or reader functions. It is not recommended for normal operations.

In Continuous Read, trigger input options are disabled, the reader is always in the read cycle, and it will attempt to decode and output every scan crossing a symbol. When To Output and Noread options have no effect on Continuous Read.

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,0

>

7-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

Continuous Read 1 Output

Usage:

Definition:

Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information. It is also effective in applications where the objects are hand-presented.

In Continuous Read 1 Output the reader self-triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs.

If End Of Read Cycle is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn't change, the reader will repeat the output at the end of each timeout period. For example, if Timeout is set to one second, the reader sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as the symbol continues to be scanned.

If End Of Read Cycle is set to New Trigger, the reader will send the current symbol data immediately, but send it only once. A new symbol appearing in the reader’s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol read.

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,1

>

Caution: In automated environments, Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is no one to verify that a symbol was missed.

Note: If Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output, Number of Symbols will default back to 1 (if set to any number greater than 1).

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-7

Trigger

External Level

Usage:

This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the reader spends scanning each object is not predictable. It also allows the user to determine if a noread has occurred.

1

Object detector

1

Initiate Read Cycle:

Object # 1, moving in front of the detector beam, causes a change in the trigger state, initiating the read cycle.

End Read Cycle:

The same object, moving out of the detector beam, causes another change in the trigger state, ending the read cycle.

Active

Associated waveforms assume External Trigger

State is set to Active

Closed.

Active

0

Object detector

0

External Level Trigger

Definition:

External Level allows the read cycle to begin when a trigger (change of state) from an external sensing device is received. The read cycle endures until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again.

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,2

>

Important: Level and Edge apply to the active logic state (Open or Closed) that exists while the object is in a read cycle, between the rising edge and falling edge. Ris-

ing edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object. Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object.

7-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

External Edge

Usage:

Definition:

This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing, object size, or timeouts are consistent.

External Trigger Edge, as with Level, allows the read cycle to begin when a trigger (change of state) from an external sensing device is received. However, the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle. The read cycle ends with a good read output or, depending on End of Read Cycle setting, a timeout or new trigger occurs.External Trigger Edge, as with Level, allows the read cycle to begin when a trigger (change of state) from an external sensing device is received. However, the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle. The read cycle ends with a good read or with a noread when a No Decode Timeout occurs.

Object detector

1

Object detector

2

Initiate Read Cycle:

Object # 1, moving in front of the detector beam, causes a change in the trigger state, initiating the read cycle.

Initiate Second Read Cycle:

Object # 2, moving in front of the detector beam, causes another change in the trigger state. This signal initiates a new read cycle and ends the previous read cycle unless Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occurred.

Active

0

Associated waveforms assume External State is set to Active Closed.

Active

0

External Edge Trigger

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,3

>

Important: Level and Edge apply to the active logic state (Open or Closed) that exists while the object is in a read cycle, between the rising edge and falling edge. Ris-

ing edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object. Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object.

Serial Data

Usage:

Definition:

Highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing, object size, or timeouts are consistent.

In Serial Data, the reader accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle. A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger.

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,4

>

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-9

Trigger

Serial Data or External Edge

Usage:

Serial Data or External Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be manually triggered. An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the aux port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the reader to the host.

Definition:

In this mode the reader accepts either a serial ASCII character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle.

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,5

>

7-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

Trigger Filter Duration

Usage:

Definition:

Trigger Filter Duration is useful where trigger bounce or noise pulses could cause false triggers.

Trigger Filter Duration is the minimum time that must elapse before a trigger pulse is considered valid.

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,

trigger mode,

trigger filter duration

>

Default:

10

(1 mS)

Options:

0.1 mS to 500 mS (in 0.1 mS increments)

External Trigger State

Note:

External Level, External Edge, or Serial Data or Edge trigger mode must be enabled for External Trigger to take effect.

Usage:

Definition:

Users can select the trigger state that will operate with their systems. (If using the Microscan object detector, use Active Closed.)

Determines whether a positive or negative transition will initiate the read cycle.

Serial Cmd:

<

K202,external trigger state

>

Default:

Active closed

Options:

0 = Active open 1 = Active closed

Important: The MS-860 is physically different from the MS-850 in trigger polarity and the calculation of raster sweeps.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-11

Serial Trigger

Serial Trigger

Usage:

Definition:

Defines the trigger character that initiates the read cycle.

An on-line host command composed of a single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates or ends the read cycle.

Trigger characters are of two types: delimited and non-delimited. A delimited character is enclosed within angle bracket delimiters

< >

.

A non-delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is NOT enclosed by delimiters such as

< >

.

Serial Trigger Character

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in applications where a single serial character enclosed in angle brackets initiates the read cycle.

A trigger character is one that starts the read cycle, is enclosed by delimiters

< >

and can only be sent when the trigger mode is set to Serial

Data or Serial Data & Edge.

Serial Cmd:

<

K201,serial trigger character

>

Default:

^]

(corresponds to

<GS>

)

Options:

Any single 7-bit ASCII character, including control characters, except NUL

(00H), an existing host command character, or an on-line protocol character.

Note: Serial Data or Serial Data & Edge triggering mode must be enabled for Serial

Trigger Character to take effect.

7-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

Non-delimited Start and Stop Characters

Note: If the serial trigger character that you assign is already assigned as an operational command—for example a “Z” character that is used in the

<Z>

command—the command will no longer function as intended.

Both Start and Stop non-delimited characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event, as follows:

When defining Start and Stop trigger characters, the following rules apply:

• In External Edge the reader looks only for the start trigger character and ignores any stop trigger character that may be defined.

• In External Level, the start trigger character begins the read cycle and stop trigger character ends it. Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted, the reader remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a

Stop character is received.

• In Serial Data & Edge trigger mode, command, either a Start Trigger Character or a hardware trigger can start an Edge trigger read cycle.

Start Character (non-delimited)

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in applications where different characters are required to start and end a read cycle.

A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as

<

and

>

.

Serial Cmd:

<

K229,start trigger character

>

Default:

Null

(disabled)

Options:

Two hex digits representing an ASCII character except

<

,

>

,

XON

and

XOFF

.

Stop Character (non-delimited)

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in applications where different characters are required to start and end a read cycle.

A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as

<

and

>

.

Serial Cmd:

<

K230,stop trigger character

>

Default:

Null

(disabled)

Options:

Two hex digits representing an ASCII character except

<

,

>

,

XON

and

XOFF

.

See Appendix E,

"ASCII Table"

, for ASCII character information.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-13

End of Read Cycle

End of Read Cycle

Note: When to Output must be set to End of Read Cycle before this command can be active.

Definition:

The read cycle is the time during which the reader will attempt to read and decode a symbol. At the end of a read cycle the reader stops reading symbols and sends the symbol data or noread message to the host.

End of Read Cycle Mode

Definition:

A read cycle can be terminated by a new trigger, a timeout, or a combination of both.

Serial Cmd:

<

K220,end of read cycle

,read cycle timeout>

Default:

Timeout

Options:

0 = Timeout 1 = New Trigger 2 = Timeout & New Trigger

Note: When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output, the reader is always in the read cycle.

Timeout

Usage:

Definition:

Typically used with Serial or Edge and Continuous One.

It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted. It assures that a read cycle ends before the next bar coded object appears, giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host.

Timeout ends the read cycle when the time set in Read Cycle Timeout elapses or “times out.”

If in Continuous Read 1 Output, a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again.

With either External Edge, Serial Data, or Serial Data & Edge enabled, a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a noread message is sent to the host.

With External Level enabled, the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger or a timeout occurs. The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger.

7-14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

New Trigger

Usage:

Definition:

New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the reader at irregular intervals (not timing dependent).

New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs. New Trigger refers only to a “rising edge” trigger.

With either External Edge, Serial, or Serial or Edge enabled, an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle.

In the case of External Level, a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger.

Note: When New Trigger is enabled and if not in External Level mode, Laser On/

Off will have no effect. When noreads occur, the laser will remain on.

Timeout or New Trigger

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle. For example, if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular.

Timeout or New Trigger

is identical to Timeout, except that a timeout

or a new trigger (whichever occurs first) ends the read cycle.

Read Cycle Timeout

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in many tightly controlled applications which require a read cycle to end before the next object appears and therefore need the flexibility of a timeout adjustment.

Read Cycle Timeout is the time span of the read cycle and is represented in 10 mS increments. It is used in conjunction with External

Edge or Serial Trigger.

Serial Cmd:

<

K220,

end of read cycle,

read cycle timeout

>

Default:

100

(Corresponds to one second or 1000 mS.)

Options:

1 to 65535. (Divide any positive number entered by 100 to determine the time in seconds.)

Timeout does not function when in Continuous or Level read cycle modes.

Continuous 1: The reader will only read a given symbol once until a timeout occurs or a different symbol is presented.

Note: A minimum setting of 2 is recommended.

Note: Timeout or Timeout or New Trigger under End of Read Cycle must be enabled for Read Cycle Timeout to take effect.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-15

Decodes Before Output

Decodes Before Output

Note

:

When setting up, determine if the reader’s scan speed is capable of scanning your longest symbol the required number of times.

Decodes Before Output Mode

Usage:

Definition:

Useful when the highest level of reliability is required.

When consecutive is enabled, the number set in Decodes Before Out-

put must be achieved consecutively before decoded data is sent. For example, if Number Before Output is set to 5, then the data will be output whenever five decodes occur in succession.

When the default non-consecutive is set, whenever a cumulative number of decodes is achieved, decoded data is sent. For example, if non-consecutive is enabled and Decodes Before Output is set to 10, then data will be sent when the total number of decodes reaches 10 regardless of the number of bad reads between decodes.

Serial Cmd:

<

K221,

number before output,

decodes before output mode

>

Default:

Non-consecutive

Options:

0 = Non-consecutive 1 = Consecutive

Number Before Output

Usage:

Definition:

This is a very useful feature to increase reliability of reads for symbologies that do not have internal error checking such as Pharmacode.

The number of decodes required per symbol before a symbol’s decoded data is sent. It requires the reader to successfully decode a symbol a designated number of times before it is sent. If it doesn’t achieve the number of good reads during the read cycle, then a noread will be sent.

Note: Higher settings will decrease throughput speed.

Serial Cmd:

<

K221,number before output,

decodes before output mode>

Default:

1

Options:

1 to 255

7-16

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

Reader Setup

Gain Level

Usage:

Definition:

Sets a voltage amplitude value for the analog circuitry.

Serial Cmd:

<

K504,gain level

,AGC sampling,AGC min,AGC max>

Default:

Can be useful for fine-tuning gain or when portions of analog signals spike, as in the case of specular reflection or extraneous noise.

Options:

50

(low or medium density reader)

Note: Gain Level is optimized at the factory before shipment; the default value may not be 50.

0 to 255

Tracking

Usage:

Options:

Useful in fine-tuning tracking or when conditions of poor contrast or blurred bar edges exist.

Caution: Changes to Tracking are typically done in Calibration. See

Chapter 4,

"Calibration"

.

Definition:

Tracks peak signals and selects an amplitude reference point to sample the analog signals for converting to digital.

Serial Cmd:

<

K520,tracking

>

Default:

45

(low or medium density reader)

Tracking is optimized at the factory before shipment; the default value may not be

45

.

10 to 127

Scan Speed

Usage:

To ensure a minimum number of scans, faster scan speeds are typically used for fast moving symbols and/or longer symbols with larger bar widths. See

“Formulas for Number of Decodes”

on page A-27.

Note: Scan beams move faster across symbols further out in the scan range since the moving beam is being projected from a spinning mirror.

Definition:

Allows the user to set the number of scans per second by controlling the spinning mirror motor speed.

Serial Cmd:

<

K500,scan speed

>

Default:

Options:

50

(x 10) low or medium density reader

30 to 120

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-17

Reader Setup

Laser Power

Usage:

Definition:

Used to optimize read performance at different distances. Typically higher power is used at greater distances.

Allows the user or calibration routine to select laser power setting.

Serial Cmd: <

K700,

laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser on position,laser off position,

laser power

>

Default:

High

Power (low or medium density reader)

Options:

0 = Low 1 = Medium 2 = High

7-18

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

Automatic Gain Control (AGC)

AGC Sampling Mode

Usage:

Definition:

AGC Sampling allows you to specify how automatic gain control sampling will be done.

AGC is the acronym for Automatic Gain Control. AGC increases the depth of field by attempting to maintain signal strength at a constant level regardless of the range of the bar code symbol.

Serial Cmd:

<

K504,

gain level,

AGC sampling mode

,AGC min,AGC max>

Default:

Continuous

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Leading Edge 2 = Continuous

Disabled

Usage:

Definition:

Leading Edge

Disabled is not recommended, but can be useful in certain applications in which symbols do not require a large depth of field.

When AGC Sampling is set to Disabled, gain levels can only be manually controlled by the Gain command.

Usage:

Definition:

Leading Edge is rarely used, but in some cases can improve scan rates when symbols are skewed and the leading edge of a symbol is difficult to locate.

Finds the leading edge of a symbol by looking for a 40µS quiet zone followed by the number of transitions set in

"Transition Counter"

on page

7-21, stores the highest value of the samples, and adjusts the AGC accordingly at the end of the scan.

Continuous

Usage:

Definition:

Continuous is the default and the preferred mode for sampling analog signal amplitude.

Samples AGC throughout the scan at the rate set in

"Transition

Counter"

on page 7-21, averages the sample values, and adjusts the

AGC value at the end of the scan.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-19

Reader Setup

AGC Minimum Gain

Definition:

Limits the minimum range of the available gain.

Serial Cmd:

<

K504,

gain level,AGC sampling mode,

AGC min

,AGC max>

Send

<K504?>

for a readout.

Default:

Options

0

(low or medium density reader)

0 to 255

AGC Maximum Gain

Definition:

Limits the maximum range of the available gain.

Serial Cmd:

<

K504,

gain level,AGC sampling mode,AGC min,

AGC max

>

Send

<K504?>

for a readout.

Default:

Options

255

(low or medium density reader)

0 to 255

Symbol Detect Status

Definition:

During the read cycle, the reader counts the number of bar and space transitions defined in the Transition Counter. If the count matches or exceeds the threshold, the reader will perform AGC routines. When enabled, a bad symbol or no symbol message can be output rather than a noread message, depending on the number of transition counts.

Serial Cmd:

<

K505,symbol detect status

,transition counter>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Symbol Detect can only be used when

"AGC Sampling Mode"

on page 7-19

<K504>

is set to Fixed Gain and

"No Symbol Message"

on page 10-9

<K716>

output is enabled.

7-20

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Read Cycle

Transition Counter

Usage:

Definition:

Can be useful in certain application where extraneous objects in the field of view might require a higher threshold.

Determines the number of bar/space transitions that are sampled before

AGC can be resolved.

Definition:

Determines the number of bar/space transitions that must be read before a symbol is considered present and AGC can be resolved.

Serial Cmd:

<

K505,

symbol detect status,

transition counter

>

Default:

16

(low or medium density reader)

Options:

1 to 255

Note: Transition Counter is used for both AGC and symbol detection routines (see

"No Symbol Message"

on page 10-9.

Maximum Element

Usage:

Definition:

Caution: Do not change this parameter unless instructed by a your technical representative.

Maximum Element represents the maximum bar element width that’s allowed before a video reset occurs (defaults to white), as measured in the percentage of the reader’s full scan width (NOT the framed scan width).

Serial Cmd:

<

K502,maximum element

>

Default:

400

(low or medium density reader)

Options:

50 to 5000 (in increments of 0.01% of scan)

Note: Values represent the reader’s full scan width, NOT the framed area.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7-21

Laser Setup

Laser Setup

See

"Laser Setup"

on page 8-6 for details on laser setup.

Raster Setup

See

"Raster Setup"

on page 8-3 for details on raster setup.

7-22

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

8

Raster/Laser

Chapter Contents

Raster/Laser Setup by ESP ........................................................................ 8-2

Raster/Laser Setup by Serial Command .................................................... 8-2

Raster Setup ............................................................................................... 8-3

Laser Setup................................................................................................. 8-6

This section explains the setup and adjustments for the raster and the laser setups.

Note: The characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

8-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Raster/Laser Setup by ESP

Raster/Laser Setup by ESP

To open nested options,

single-click

the +.

Click

on this button to bring up the

Raster/Laser menu.

To change a setting,

double-click

on the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options.

Note: Raster setup commands in the ESP are accessed from the Read Cycle/Triggering menu or from the Raster/Laser or Calibration menus on the ESP toolbar.

Raster/Laser Setup by Serial Command

Raster Setup

Laser Setup

Raster/Laser

<

K506,

raster status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>

<

K700,

laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser on position,laser off

position,laser power>

8-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Raster/Laser

Raster Setup

You can setup and make changes to the reader’s raster parameters in ESP in the Read

Cycle menu, the Calibration menu, or the Raster/Laser menu (preferred).

Usage:

Definition:

Raster scanning is useful when symbols vary in placement and a single scan line cannot be counted on to cross the symbol, and for reading stacked symbologies such as PDF417.

The user can enable raster scanning and adjust the raster sweep limits and the sweep rate.

Raster Status

Definition:

When disabled, the raster mirror will park at the top of the raster sweep.

Serial Cmd:

<

K506,raster status

,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Raster sweeps are only counted during a read cycle (continuous, triggered, and read rate). Raster sweeps are NOT counted when the raster motor is parked, disabled, set to straight line operation (top and bottom are equal), or when performing a self-calibration.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

8-3

Raster Setup

Top Offset

Definition:

Decreasing the Top Offset value causes the top of the raster pattern to move up.

Serial Cmd:

<

K506,

raster status,

top offset

,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>

Default:

Options:

88

0 to 255

Bottom Offset

Definition:

Increasing the Bottom Offset value causes the bottom of the raster pattern to move down.

Serial Cmd:

<

K506,

raster status,top offset,

bottom offset

,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>

Default:

Options:

167

0 to 255

Note

:

For single scan line operation, set Top Offset equal to Bottom Offset or click on the Static Line option.

Note

:

Assigning a larger value to Top Offset than Bottom Offset will park the raster mirror in its “home” (default) position.

8-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Raster/Laser

Raster Sweep Rate

Usage:

Definition:

If your application allows it, a slower sweep rate can produce more scans per second and higher read rates. To determine the minimum

read rate for your application, see

"Raster Picket Fence Calculation"

on page A-21.

The raster sweep rate is the number of sweeps per second the raster mirror completes. A sweep is one pass of the raster, up or down. The maximum sweep rate is limited by the size of the arc the raster must move through.

Serial Cmd:

<

K506,

raster status,top offset,bottom offset,

raster sweep rate

,read cycle on/off>

Default:

Options:

10

0 to 80.

To maximize the number of scans per symbol, use the lowest effective sweep rate required for the application.

Important

: The MS-860 is physically different from the MS-850 in trigger polarity and the calculation of raster sweeps.

Read Cycle On/Off

Usage:

Definition:

This feature should only be used when the raster sweep rate is at least twice the required trigger rate (decoded outputs per second).

When Read Cycle On/Off is enabled and Laser On/Off is also enabled, the raster mirror stops at top offset at the end of triggered read cycle.

Serial Cmd:

<

K506,

raster status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,

read cycle on/off

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

8-5

Laser Setup

Laser Setup

To access the Laser Framing menu, click the Raster/Laser button and the Laser

Framing tab.

Laser On/Off

Usage:

Laser On/Off extends the life of the laser. It is useful where there are significant time gaps between symbols. It also provides visual confirmation of a read cycle timeout and minimizes laser exposure to people.

Definition:

When enabled, the laser is ON only during the read cycle. When disabled, the laser operates continuously.

Serial Cmd: <

K700,laser on/off status

,laser framing status,laser on position,laser

off position,laser power>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

To enable Laser On/Off, check the

Laser on only during Read Cycle

checkbox and click

Send and Save

.

8-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Raster/Laser

Laser Framing

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in avoiding highly reflective objects, for filtering out unwanted signals, or avoiding the wrong symbols.

When Laser Framing is disabled, the laser is ON for 100 percent of the full scan. When enabled, the extent of the laser arc is determined by the

Laser On Position and Laser Off Position settings.

Serial Cmd: <

K700,

laser on/off status,

laser framing status

,laser on position,laser

off position,laser power>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Manual Adjustment

To adjust laser framing, check the

Laser Framing

box as shown in the illustration and click the

Send and Save

button.

After saving, handles will appear at the upper and lower ends of the laser frame when the cursor enters the Laser Framing pane. When it touches either handle, the cursor becomes a double arrow. Left click and you can drag the handle to another position as shown dynamically in the On Position and Off

Position selector boxes.

Automatic Adjustment

To adjust laser framing automatically, click the

Calibration

button

Laser Framing

and click the

Auto Frame

button. If a symbol is in the raster/laser pattern, the reader will shorten the laser On Position and Off Position determining the full width of the symbol.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

8-7

Laser Setup

Laser On Position

Definition:

The Laser On Percentage of the full scan arc that the scan beam moves through before the laser turns ON. For example, if set for 30, the laser will be off during the first 30 percent of the scan.

Serial Cmd: <

K700,

laser on/off status,laser framing status,

laser on position

,laser

off position,laser power>

Default:

Options:

10

10 to 90

Laser Off Position

Definition:

Percentage of the full scan arc that the scan beam moves through before the laser turns OFF.

Notes:

The combined values of Laser On Position and Laser Off Position cannot exceed 100 percent, the total arc of one scan.

Laser Off Position must always exceed the value of Laser On Position for an actual laser scan to take place.

Serial Cmd: <

K700,

laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser on position,

laser off position

,laser power>

Default:

Options:

95

15 to 95

Laser Power

Usage:

Definition:

Used to optimize read performance at different distances. Typically, higher power is used at greater distances.

Allows the user or calibration routine to select laser power setting.

Serial Cmd: <

K700,

laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser on position,laser off position,

laser power

>

Default:

High

Power (for low or medium density reader)

1 = Medium 2 = High

Options:

0 = Low

Low power ~ 0.6 mW

Medium power ~ 1.0 mW

High power ~ 1.5 mW

8-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

9

Symbologies

Chapter Contents

Symbologies by ESP...................................................................................9-2

Symbologies by Serial Command ...............................................................9-3

1D Symbologies ..........................................................................................9-4

Stacked Symbologies ................................................................................9-26

Narrow Margins .........................................................................................9-29

Symbology ID ............................................................................................9-30

Background Color......................................................................................9-31

Autodiscriminate........................................................................................9-31

Code 39 is enabled by default. To enable most symbologies, send a

<P>

serial command to the reader from the Terminal window.

Composite are unchanged.

1

This enables: Code 39, Code 128, Codabar,

I-2/5, UPC, and Code 93. PDF417 and Pharmacode are disabled. Micro PDF417, RSS, and

Note: When assigning characters in user-defined fields, the characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

,

1. If using an I 2/5 symbol, verify that the number of characters in the symbol being scanned matches the code length enabled for the I 2/5 symbol type (default is 10 and 6).

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-1

Symbologies by ESP

Symbologies by ESP

Click this Button to bring up the

Symbologies

menu

To open nested options,

single-click

the +.

To change a setting,

double-click

the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options.

9-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Symbologies by Serial Command

Code 39

Code 128/EAN-128

Interleaved 2 of 5

Codabar

UPC/EAN

Code 93

RSS Expanded

RSS Limited

RSS-14

Pharmacode

PDF417

Micro PDF417

Composite

Narrow Margins/Symbology

ID

Background Color

Symbologies

<

K470,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,full ASCII set>

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application

record separator character,application record brackets,application record

padding>

<

K472,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,symbol length

#1,symbol length #2,guard bar status,range mode>

<

K471,

status,start & stop match status,start & stop output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check digit type,check digit output status>

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplementals type,UPC-E output as UPC-A>

<

K475,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

<

K484,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

<

K483,

status>

<

K482,

status>

<

K477,

status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars,bar widths,direction,fixed threshold value>

<

K476,

status,[unused],fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,decode at end of read>

<

K485,

status,[unused],fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

<

K453,

mode,separator status,separator>

<

K450,

narrow margins status

, symbology identifier>

<

K451,

background color>

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-3

1D Symbologies

1D Symbologies

Code 39

Usage:

Definition:

Code 39 is considered the standard for non-retail bar code applications.

An alphanumeric symbol with unique start/stop symbol patterns, composed of 9 black and white elements per character, of which 3 are wide.

Code 39 Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,status

,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,full ASCII set>

Default:

Enabled

Note: This is the only symbol type enabled by default.

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Check Digit Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,

check digit status

,check digit output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,full ASCII set>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Check Digit Output

Usage:

Definition:

Check Digit Output Status, added to the symbol, provides additional security.

When enabled, the check digit character is read and sent along with the symbol data. When disabled, symbol data is sent without the check digit.

Note: With Check Digit Output Status and an External or Serial trigger option enabled, an invalid check digit calculation will cause a noread message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle.

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check digit status,

check digit output

,large intercharacter

gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,full ASCII set>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

9-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Large Intercharacter Gap

Usage:

Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification.

Caution: Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow Margins enabled since a large intercharacter gap (over 3x) could cause a narrow margins (5x) to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap.

Definition:

When enabled, the reader can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times (3x) the narrow element width.

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check digit status,check digit output,

large intercharacter gap

,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,full ASCII set>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status

Usage:

Definition:

Helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only a fixed symbol length will be accepted.

When enabled, the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field. If disabled, any length is considered a valid symbol.

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,large intercharac-

ter gap,

fixed symbol length status

,symbol length,full ASCII set>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Symbol Length

Definition:

Specifies the exact number of characters that the reader will recognize

(this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The reader ignores any symbol not having the specified length.

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,

symbol length

,full ASCII set>

Default:

Default:

10

1 to 128

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-5

1D Symbologies

Full ASCII Set

Usage:

Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set (0-9, A-Z, etc.)

Definition:

User must know in advance whether or not to use Full ASCII Set option.

Since Full ASCII Set requires two symbol words to encode one character, it is less efficient.

Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters; zero through nine, capital “A” through capital “Z”, minus symbol, plus symbol, forward slash, space, decimal point, dollar sign and percent symbol. When Full ASCII Set is enabled, the reader can read the full ASCII character set, from 0 to 255.

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check digit status,check digit output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,

full ASCII set

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

9-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Code 128/EAN

Usage:

Definition:

Code 128/EAN is useful in applications with tight spots and high security needs.

A very dense alphanumeric symbology. It encodes all 128 ASCII characters; it is continuous, has variable length, and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge.

Code 128 Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,status

,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application

record separator character,application record brackets,application record

padding>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Code 128 must be Enabled for EAN-128 to function.

Fixed Symbol Length Status

Usage:

Definition:

Helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only a fixed symbol length will be accepted.

When enabled, the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field. When disabled, any length is considered a valid symbol.

Serial Cmd: <

K474,

status,

fixed symbol length status

,fixed symbol length,EAN-

128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Symbol Length

Definition:

Specifies a fixed number of characters that the reader will recognize (this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The reader ignores any symbol not having the specified length.

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,

fixed symbol length

,EAN-128

status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record

padding>

Default:

Options:

10

1 to 128

Note: Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Symbol Length to take effect.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-7

1D Symbologies

EAN-128 Status

Note: Code 128 must be Enabled for EAN-128 to function.

Usage:

Definition:

Used as a standard for shipping symbols.

A subset of Code 128, with extended features. (For more information, see

GS1 US at:

http://www.gs1us.org/gs1us.html

Or see AIM, at:

http://www.aimglobal.org/standards/aimpubs.asp

.

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,

EAN-128 status

,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record

padding>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 = Required

If set to Enabled, symbols can be read with or without a function 1 character in the first position.

If set to Required, the symbol must have a function 1 in the first position and conform to EAN format in order to decode the symbol.

Output Format

Usage:

Definition:

Application Record is useful in applications in which the software can utilize application record formatting to help automate the processing of its EAN-128 data.

Offers an option between Standard EAN-128 and Application Record format.

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN-128 status,

output format

,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record

padding>

Default:

Standard

Options:

0 = Application 1 = Standard

In Standard UCC/EAN-128 application identifiers and data fields are sent, but none of the formatting (separators, parentheses, padding) will be included.

Application Record is a variation of UCC/EAN-128 that allows the user to define separators between data fields, enclose application identifiers in parentheses, and enable padding (zeros) for variable length fields.

Note: If an illegal Application Record format is detected, the reader will process it as a noread and output a noread message (if enabled).

9-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Application Record Separator Status

Definition:

When enabled, a separator character is inserted between application records.

Serial Cmd: <

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN-128 status,output format,

application record separator status,

application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Output Format must be set to Application Record before this parameter can take effect.

Note: When set to Disable, app rec sep char is forced to NUL. When set to Enabled,

Application Record Separator Character must also be sent in the same command.

Application Record Separator Character

Note: Application Record Separator Character Status is enabled by setting the parameter to any value other than a null.

Definition:

Allows the user to define an ASCII character as an application record separator.

Serial Cmd: <

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,

application record separator character

,application record brackets,application record padding>

Default:

Options:

,

(comma)

User Defined ASCII character

Note: Has no effect unless Application Record Separator Status is enabled.

Application Record Brackets

Definition:

When enabled, parentheses ( ) are added to enclose application identifiers.

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character

,application record brackets

,application

record padding>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Output Format must be set to Application Record before this parameter can take effect.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-9

1D Symbologies

Application Record Padding

Definition:

Padding is the insertion of zeros to make up the maximum length of a variable application record data field, except for the last field which does not require padding.

When enabled, padding is included. When disabled, padding is omitted.

Note: Padding is never added to fixed length fields or to the last data field of a symbol. Enabling or disabling Record Padding will have no effect on these.

Serial Cmd: <

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,

application record padding

>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Output Format must be set to Application Record before this parameter can take effect.

9-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Interleaved 2 of 5

Usage:

Definition:

It is has been popular because it is the most dense symbol for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length; however, we do not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as truncation.

A dense, continuous, self-checking, numeric symbology. Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements, two wide and three narrow, representing numbers 0 through 9, with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character. (A check digit is highly recommended.)

Important

: You must set Symbol Length in order to decode I–2/5 symbols.

Interleaved 2 of 5 Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,status

,check digit status,check digit output status,symbol length

#1,symbol length #2,guard bar status,range mode>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Check Digit Status

Usage:

Definition:

It is typically not used but can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check digit verification.

An error correcting routine in which the check digit character is added.

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,

status,

check digit status

,check digit output status,symbol length #1,symbol length #2,guard bar status,range mode>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Check Digit Output Status

Definition:

When enabled, a check digit character is sent along with the bar symbol data for added data security.

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,

status,check digit status,

check digit output status

,symbol length #1,symbol length #2,guard bar status,range mode>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-11

1D Symbologies

Symbol Length #1

Usage:

Definition:

With I–2/5, two symbol lengths can be defined. When using only one symbol length in an application, setting Symbol Length #2 to 0 (zero) to ensure data integrity is recommended.

Allows user to define the symbol length. Because I–2/5 is a continuous symbology, it is prone to substitution errors. Hence, a symbol length must be defined and a symbol must contain an even number of digits.

Note: If start, stop or check digits are used, they are not included in the symbol length count.

Serial Cmd: <

K472,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,

symbol length #1

,symbol length #2,guard bar status,range mode>

Default:

Options:

10

0 to 128

Symbol Length #2

Usage:

If using a second symbol, a zero or any even symbol length from 2 to 64 may be specified. If not using a second symbol, set Symbol Length #2 to 0 to ensure data integrity.

Definition:

Default:

Options:

Allows user to define a second symbol length for I–2/5.

Serial Cmd: <

K472,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,symbol length

#1,

symbol length #2

,guard bar status,range mode>

6

0 to 128

Since I–2/5 characters are paired, symbol length must be set to an even number. If Check Digit is enabled, add 2 to your symbol length. For example, if your symbol is 10 characters plus a check digit, then enable

Symbol Length for 12.

Note: Typically, when printing an I–2/5 symbol with an odd number of digits, a 0 will be added as the first character.

Options:

0 to 128

Important: When setting Symbol Length to any number other than 0, add 1 to account for a reserved space. For example, if your symbol has 3 characters, set Symbol Length to 4.

9-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Guard Bar

Usage:

Definition:

Useful when I–2/5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output. This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols.

A guard bar is a heavy bar, at least 2 times the width of the wide bar, surrounding the printed I–2/5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads.

Serial Cmd: <

K472,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,symbol length

#1,symbol length #2,

guard bar status

,range mode>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Range Mode Status

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in applications where symbol lengths may vary.

Allows user the option to define a minimum and maximum symbol length range for I–2/5.

Serial Cmd: <

K472,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,symbol length

#1,symbol length #2,guard bar status,

range mode

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

When enabled, the symbol length range is defined by the values set in Symbol Length

#1 and Symbol Length #2.

For example, if the symbol lengths are defined as 10 and 6, a symbol of length 6, 8, or

10 will qualify as candidates for I–2/5.

Note: Either length (1 or 2) can qualify as the minimum or maximum.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-13

1D Symbologies

Codabar

Usage:

Definition:

Used in photo-finishing and library applications. Formerly used in some medical applications but not typically used in newer applications.

Codabar is a 16-character set (0 through 9, and the characters $, :, /, .,

+, and –) with start/stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths.

Codabar Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,status

,start & stop match status,start & stop output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check digit type,check digit output status>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Start & Stop Match Status

Usage:

Definition:

Used to increase security of symbology.

Requires the Codabar start and stop characters (a, b, c, or d) to match before a valid read can occur.

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,

start & stop match status

,start & stop output sta-

tus,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol

length,check digit type,check digit output status>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Start & Stop Output Status

Usage:

Definition:

Used to verify matching.

Causes the start and stop characters to be transmitted with symbol data.

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start & stop match status,

start & stop output status

,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check digit type,check digit status,check digit output status>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

9-14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Large Intercharacter Gap

Usage:

It is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification.

Caution: Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow Margins enabled since enabling Large Intercharacter Gap (over 3x) could cause a narrow margins (5x) to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap.

Definition:

Instructs the reader to read symbols with gaps between characters exceeding three times the narrow element width.

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start & stop match status,start & stop output status,

large intercharacter gap

,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check digit type,check digit output status>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status

Usage:

Definition:

Helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

When set to Enabled, the reader will check the symbol length against the

Fixed Symbol Length field.

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start & stop match status,start & stop output status,large intercharacter gap,

fixed symbol length status

,symbol length,check digit type,check digit output status>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Symbol Length

Definition:

Specifies the exact number of characters that the reader will recognize

(this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The reader ignores any symbol not having the specified length.

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start & stop match status,start & stop output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,

symbol length

,check digit type,check digit output status>

Default:

Options:

10

1 to 128

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-15

1D Symbologies

Important:

• When setting Symbol Length to any number other than zero, add

2

to account for reserved spaces. For example, if your symbol has

3

characters, set Symbol Length to

5

.

• If Symbol Length is set to zero (

0

) and Symbol Length Status is set to

Any/

Minimum

, all symbol lengths are decoded.

Note: Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Symbol Length to take effect.

Note: Because of symbology limitations, setting Symbol Length to any number less than four will produce undetermined results.

Check Digit Type

Usage:

Definition:

Modulus 16 is used in the photo-finishing market.NW7 is used in Japanese markets.

Allows the user to select the check digit type Codabar will use.

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start & stop match,start & stop output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,

check digit type

,check digit output status>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Modulus 16

2 = NW 7

3 = Both

Check Digit Output Status

Usage:

Definition:

For additional security a check digit can be added to the symbol.

When enabled, the check digit character is sent along with the symbol data. When disabled, symbol data is sent without the check digit.

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start & stop match,start & stop output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check digit type,

check digit output status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

9-16

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

UPC/EAN

Usage:

Definition:

Used primarily in POS application in the retail industry. It is commonly used in applications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging.

UPC (Universal Product Code) is a fixed length numeric, continuous symbology. UPC can have two- or five-digit supplemental symbol data following the normal code. The U.P.C., Version A (U.P.C., A) symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number. The first digit is the number system character, the next five are the manufacturer number, the next five are the product number, and the last digit is the checksum character.

When enabled, the reader will read UPC version A and UPC version E only.

UPC Status

Usage:

Definition:

Useful where both UPC Version A and Version E symbols are present.

When enabled, the reader attempts to read both versions.

Note: The extra character identifies the country of origin.

Serial Cmd: <

K473,UPC status

,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplementals type,UPC-E output as UPC-A>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

EAN Status

Usage:

Definition:

Used with EAN, the European version of the UPC symbology.

EAN is a subset of UPC. When enabled, the reader will read UPC version

A, UPC version E, EAN 13, and EAN 8. It also appends a leading zero to

UPC version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits. If transmitting

13 digits when reading UPC version A symbols is not desired, disable

EAN.

Note: The extra character identifies the country of origin.

Serial Cmd: <

K473,

UPC status,

EAN status

,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplementals type,UPC-E output as UPC-A>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-17

1D Symbologies

Supplementals Status

Usage:

Definition:

Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation.

A supplemental is a 2 or 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol.

When set to Enabled or Required, the reader reads supplemental symbol data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes.

Serial Cmd: <

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,

supplementals status

,separator status,separator character,supplementals type,UPC-E output as UPC-A>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 = Required

Disabled

UPC Supplementals will not be decoded.

Enabled

When enabled, the reader will try to decode a main and a supplemental. However, if a supplemental is not decoded, at the end of the read cycle, the main will be sent by itself. The UPC main and supplemental symbols are considered to be one symbol and will be treated as such.

Required

When set to Required and either the main or supplemental symbol is not read, a single noread condition results. The UPC main and supplemental symbols are treated as one symbol.

For example, if Supplementals is set to Required, Separator is enabled, and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character, then the data will be displayed as:

MAIN * SUPPLEMENTAL.Note: Under no circumstances will supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol.

Note: If additional symbols—other than the main or supplemental—will be read in the same read cycle, Number of symbols should be set accordingly.

Separator Status

Note: UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect.

Definition:

Allows the user to insert a character between the standard UPC or EAN symbol and the supplemental symbol when Supplementals is set to

Enabled or Required.

Serial Cmd: <

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,

separator status

,separator character,supplementals type,UPC-E output as UPC-A>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

9-18

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Separator Character

Note: If Separator Character has been changed to any other character and you wish to re-define the separator as a comma, you will need to use ESP or the embedded menu.

Usage:

Definition:

As required by the application.

Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character.

Serial Cmd: <

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,

separator character

,supplementals type,UPC-E output as UPC-A>

Default:

Options:

,

(

comma

)

Any ASCII character

Note: Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma (,) sending a <

K473?

> command will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma.

Supplementals Type

Usage:

Definition:

As required by symbology used in application.

Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplement, or both.

Serial Cmd: <

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,

supplementals type

,UPC-E output as UPC-A>

Default:

Both

Options:

0 = Both 1 = 2 char only 2 = 5 char only

UPC-E Output to UPC-A

Usage:

Definition:

Useful for applications that require UPC-A output.

Allows the user to output UPC-E as UPC-A, or EAN-13, depending on the setting in the EAN status field.

Serial Cmd: <

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplementals type,

UPC-E output as UPC-A

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-19

1D Symbologies

Code 93

Usage:

Definition:

Used occasionally in clinical industry.

Code 93 is a variable length, continuous symbology employing four element widths. Each Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white. Each character contains three bars and three spaces.

Code 93 Status

Serial Cmd: <

K475,status

,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status

Usage:

Definition:

Helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

When enabled, the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field. When disabled, any length is considered a valid symbol.

Serial Cmd:

<

K475,

status,

fixed symbol length status

,symbol length>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Symbol Length

Definition:

Specifies the exact number of characters that the reader will recognize

(this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The reader ignores any symbol not having the specified length.

Serial Cmd:

<

K475,

status,fixed symbol length status,

fixed symbol length

>

Default:

10

Options:

1 to 128

9-20

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

RSS Expanded

Usage:

Definition:

Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point-of-sale and other applications.

RSS Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters.

Serial Cmd:

<

K484,status

,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status

Definition:

When enabled, the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field, minus the embedded check digit. If disabled, any length would be considered a valid symbol.

Serial Cmd:

<

K484,

status,

fixed symbol length status

,fixed symbol length>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length

Usage:

Definition:

Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

Specifies the exact number of characters that the reader will recognize

(this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The reader ignores any symbol not having the specified length.

Serial Cmd:

<

K484,

status,fixed symbol length status,

fixed symbol length

>

Default:

14

Options:

1 to 74

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-21

1D Symbologies

RSS Limited

Usage:

Definition:

RSS Limited is designed to be read by laser and CCD readers. It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot readers.

Encodes a smaller 14-digit symbol (74 modules wide) that is not omnidirectional.

Serial Cmd:

<

K483,status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

9-22

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

RSS-14

Usage:

Definition:

Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where full 14digit EAN.UCC item identification may be needed.

RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology) is a fixed length symbology that encodes 14-digits, including a 1 digit indicator digit and is 96 modules wide. It can be stacked into two rows, read omnidirectional if printed in full height, or not if height-truncated for small marking.

Serial Cmd:

<

K482,status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-23

1D Symbologies

Pharmacode

Usage:

Definition:

Pharmacode is used mostly with packaging for the pharmaceuticals industry.

The symbol encodes up to five different numbers, each with its own color which may be entered in decimal or “binary” format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar. Bar width is independent of height.

In decimal format, each part can be up to 999999.

In binary format, each input have up to 19 ones and zeros.

Note: It is recommended that you disable AGC before enabling Pharmacode.

Pharmacode Status

Serial Cmd: <

K477,status

,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars,bar widths,direction,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status

Definition:

Helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

Serial Cmd: <

K477,

status,

fixed bar length status

,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars,bar widths,direction,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Symbol Length

Usage:

Definition:

Helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

Specifies the exact number of characters that the reader will recognize

(this does not include start and stop and check digit characters). The reader ignores any symbol not having the specified length.

Serial Cmd: <

K477,

status,fixed bar length status,

fixed bar length

,min. no. of bars,bar widths,direction,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Options:

10

4 to 16

9-24

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Minimum Bars

Definition:

Specifies the direction that a bar can be read.

Serial Cmd: <

K477,

status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,

min. no. of bars

,bar widths,direction,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Options:

4

4 to 16

Bar Width Status

Serial Cmd: <

K477,

status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars,

bar widths

,direction,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Mixed

Options:

0 = Mixed

1 = Narrow

2 = Wide

3 = Fixed Threshold Value

Direction

Definition:

Specifies the direction that a bar can be read.

Serial Cmd: <

K477,

status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars, bar widths,

direction

,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Forward

Options:

0 = Forward 1 = Reverse

Fixed Threshold Value

Definition:

Used when Bar Width Status field is set to Fixed Threshold Value.

Serial Cmd: <

K477,

status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars, bar widths,direction,

fixed threshold value

>

Default:

Options:

400

1 to 65535

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-25

Stacked Symbologies

Stacked Symbologies

PDF417

PDF Status

Serial Cmd: <

K476,status

,[unused],fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,decode at end of read>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status

Serial Cmd: <

K476,

status,[unused],

fixed symbol length status

,fixed symbol length,decode at end of read>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length

Usage:

Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

Serial Cmd: <

K476,

status,[unused],fixed symbol length status,

fixed symbol length

,decode at end of read>

Default:

Options:

10

1 to 2710

Note: Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect.

Decode at End of Read

Serial Cmd: <

K476,

status,[unused],fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,

decode at end of read

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

9-26

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Micro PDF417

Usage:

Definition:

Used for labeling small items that need large capacity.

A variant of PDF417, a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol.

Serial Cmd: <

K485,status

,[unused],fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status

Serial Cmd: <

K485,

status,[unused],

fixed symbol length status

,fixed symbol length>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length

Usage:

Definition:

Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

When enabled, the Micro PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read. The reader will ignore any symbol not having the specified length.

Serial Cmd: <

K485,

status,[unused],fixed symbol length status,

fixed symbol length

>

Default:

Options:

10

1 to 366

Note: Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-27

Stacked Symbologies

Composite

When set to Enabled or Required, will attempt to decode the composite component of a linear symbol. The linear symbol can be RSS14, RSS Expanded, RSS Limited, UCC/

EAN-128, UPC-A, EAN-13, EAN-8, and UPC-E.

Usage:

Definition:

Allows reading by both linear and 2D readers.

Combines 2D and linear width modulated symbology on the same symbol where different messages can be read by each reader type.

Serial Cmd: <

K453,mode

,separator status,separator>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 = Required

Note: When Composite is set to Enabled or Required, all UPC symbols are considered part of a Composite symbol.

Enabled

If set to Enabled and it only decodes the linear component, it will output only the linear component.

Required

If set to Required, it must decode both the linear and the composite components; otherwise it outputs a noread.

Separator Status

Usage:

Allows user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols.

Definition:

This separator separates the linear symbol and the composite component.

Serial Cmd: <

K453,

mode,

separator status

,separator>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Separator Character

Note: If Separator Character has been changed to any other character and you wish to re-define the separator as a comma, you will need to use ESP or the embedded menu.

Usage:

Definition:

As required by the application.

Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character.

Serial Cmd: <

K453,

mode,separator status,

separator

>

Default:

,

(

comma

)

Options:

Any ASCII character

9-28

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Narrow Margins

Usage:

Definition:

Used when the leading and trailing edges of the symbols are smaller than the standard margin or when other objects encroach into the margins.

Allows the reader to read symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times the width of the narrow bar element. “Quiet zone” is the space at the leading and trailing ends of a symbol. Each quiet zone can be as narrow as only five times the width of the narrow bar element when Narrow Margins is enabled.

Serial Cmd:

<

K450,narrow margins status

,symbology identifier>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Do not use Narrow Margins with Large Intercharacter Gap enabled in Code

39 or Codabar.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-29

Symbology ID

Symbology ID

Usage:

Definition:

Used when the symbology type and how it’s decoded needs to be known.

Symbology ID is an AIM standard prefix set of characters that identify the symbol type.

When enabled, the reader analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data:

1.

]

(close bracket character) indicating the presence of a symbology ID

2.

A, C, E, I, L, Q, b, d, p, P, M

A = Code 39, C = Code 128 or EAN-128, E = UPC/EAN,

I = I–2/5, F = Codabar; G = Code 93, L = PDF417, a = Pharmacode, e = Composite/RSS, L = PDF417 and Micro PDF417

3.

Modifier

(see Explanation of Modifiers below)

Serial Cmd:

<

K450,

narrow margins,

symbology identifier status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39, Codabar, and I

2/5

• For Code 39, Codabar and I–2/5, the modifier indicates Check Digit and Check

Digit Output Status.

• For Code 39 only, Full ASCII needs to be enabled to see modifiers

4

,

5

, and

7

.

Modifier

3

4

0

1

5

7

Check Digit

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Check Digit

Output

N/A

Enabled

Disabled

N/A

Enabled

Disabled

Full ASCII conversion performed

(Code 39 only)

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Example:

]A5

indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Digit and Check Digit Output

Status enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed.

For Other Codes

• For Code 128, a

1

indicates EAN-128; otherwise the modifier is a

0

.

• For all other codes, the modifier is

0

.

9-30

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Symbologies

Background Color

Usage:

If the background is darker than the symbol, then enable black background.

Definition:

Typically the background is white; but on PCBs for example, they can be black.

Allows the user to choose which symbol background (spaces and surrounding medium) the reader can read.

Serial Cmd:

<

K451,background color

>

Default:

White

Options:

0 = White 1 = Black

Autodiscriminate

Although Autodiscriminate is not a configuration command, but it is included here as a convenient tool for enabling most symbol types.

Usage:

Definition:

Commonly used for quick setup mode to detect symbol type. This is particularly useful for users who might be unfamiliar with their application’s symbology.

Note: It does not alter individual fields such as Start/Stop, Fixed

Length, etc. These need to be setup individually.

Enables all available symbology types except PDF417, UCC/EAN 128,

PDF417, Micro PDF417, and RSS. The user may also individually disable/ enable each symbology type.

Serial Cmd:

<P>

Default:

Code 39

(only)

Options:

<P>

Enables all codes except noted above.

<Q>

Enables Code 39 only

<R>

Enables Codabar only

<S>

Enables I 2/5 only

Note: If using an I 2/5 symbol, verify that the number of characters in the symbol being scanned matches the symbol length enabled for the I 2/5 symbol type (default is

10 and 6).

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9-31

Autodiscriminate

9-32

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

10

I/O Parameters

Chapter Contents

I/O Parameters by ESP .............................................................................10-2

I/O Parameters by Serial Command..........................................................10-3

Symbol Data Output ..................................................................................10-4

Noread Message .......................................................................................10-7

Bad Symbol Message ...............................................................................10-8

No Symbol Message .................................................................................10-9

Output Indicators .....................................................................................10-10

Serial Verification ....................................................................................10-12

EZ Button ................................................................................................10-14

Input ........................................................................................................10-15

Output 1...................................................................................................10-16

Output 2...................................................................................................10-23

Output 3...................................................................................................10-24

Quality Output .........................................................................................10-25

Database Number Output .......................................................................10-26

Symbol Position Output...........................................................................10-27

Read Duration Output .............................................................................10-30

This section includes instructions for setting up conditions for beeper and EZ Button controls and for changing input/output of data messages and electrical transitions for control of internal and external devices.

Note: The characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

Note: You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number, as in

<K100?>

. To see all “

K

” commands, send

<K?>

.

Note on Serial Commands: To preserve continuity with other Microscan products, some serial configuration commands may include 0s (zeros) or 1s as placeholders. In order for a these commands to be implemented, the placeholders must be included.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-1

I/O Parameters by ESP

I/O Parameters by ESP

Click this button to bring up the

I/O Parameters

menu

To open nested options,

single-click

the +.

To change a setting,

double-click

the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options.

10-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

I/O Parameters by Serial Command

Symbol Data Output

Noread Message

Bad Symbol Message

No Symbol Message

Output Indicators

Beeper

Serial Verification

Input 1

Output 1

Trend Analysis (1)

Diagnostics (1)

Output 2

Trend Analysis (2)

Diagnostics (2)

Output 3

Trend Analysis (3)

Diagnostics (3)

Quality Output

Database Number Output

Symbol Position Output

Read Duration Output

I-O Parameters

<

K705,

symbol data output mode,when to output>

<

K714,

status,noread message>

<

K715,

bad symbol status,bad symbol message>

<

K716,

no symbol status,no symbol message>

<

K750,

green flash mode,[unused],green flash duration>

<

K702,

beeper output>

<

K701,

serial command echo status,serial command beep status,con-

trol/hex output>

<

K730,

input mode,active state>

<

K810,

output on,active state,pulse width,output mode>

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output

on,decodes/trigger threshold>

<

K790,

over temperature,service threshold,[unused],laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

<

K811,

output on,output state,pulse width,output mode>

<

K781,

trend analysis mode,number of triggers,number to output

on,decodes/trigger threshold>

<

K791,

over temperature,service threshold,unused,laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

<

K812,

output on,output state,pulse width,output mode>

<

K782,

trend analysis mode,number of triggers,number to output

on,decodes/trigger threshold>

<

K792,

over temperature,service threshold,unused,laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

<

K704,

quality output separator,decodes/trigger status,decode direction

status>

<

K759,

status,separator>

<

K758,

raster status,scan status,separator>

<

K706,

status,separator>

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-3

Symbol Data Output

Symbol Data Output

Usage:

Definition:

Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions.

Defines the conditions under which decoded symbols are transmitted to the host.

Symbol Data Output Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K705,symbol output status

,when to output>

Default:

Good Read

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Match

2 = Mismatch

3 = Good Read

Note: If set to Match or Mismatch, Symbol Output Status will not take effect unless

Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory.

Disabled

Usage:

Definition:

Useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the reader to do the decision-making. When Disabled, the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks.

When set to

Disabled

, the reader will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle (symbols, noreads, etc.).

Match

Usage:

Definition:

Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort, route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data.

When set to

Match

, the reader transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol. However, if Matchcode Type is Disabled, it transmits on any good read.

Note: A noread can still be transmitted if Enabled.

Mismatch

Usage:

Definition:

Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container.

With

Mismatch

enabled, the reader transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol.

Note: A noread can still be transmitted if enabled.

10-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Good Read

Usage:

Definition:

Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted. It’s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified.

With

Good Read

enabled, the reader transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting.

Note: A noread can still be transmitted if enabled.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-5

Symbol Data Output

When to Output Symbol Data

Definition:

This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host.

Serial Cmd:

<

K705,

symbol output status,

when to output

>

Default:

As Soon As Possible

Options:

0 = As Soon As Possible 1 = End of Read Cycle

As Soon As Possible

Usage:

Definition:

As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host, typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data.

Enabling

As Soon As Possible

causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded.

Note: More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good decode, depending on how Decodes Before Output is set.

End of Read Cycle

Note: See

"End of Read Cycle"

on page 7-14 for options to end the read cycle.

Usage:

Definition:

End of Read Cycle is useful in timing-based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time it is decoded.

Enabling

End of Read Cycle

means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger.

Host activates trigger

Read Cycle

This is when host expects output

10-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Noread Message

Usage:

Definition:

Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification.

When enabled, and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle, the noread message will be transmitted to the host.

Noread Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K714,status

,noread message>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Noread Message

Definition:

Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the noread message.

Serial Cmd:

<

K714,

status,

noread message

>

Default:

NOREAD

Options:

1 to 128 ASCII characters.

Note: Noread Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Output (

"Symbol Data

Output Status"

on page 10-4) is set to Match, Mismatch or Good Read.

Noread Message can be set to any ASCII characters except

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-7

Bad Symbol Message

Bad Symbol Message

Note: Bad Symbol Message does not apply to multisymbol operations.

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in verifying the presence of a symbol that has not been decoded.

When enabled, a message is sent to the host when a symbol is detected

but not decoded. See

"Transition Counter"

on page 7-21.

The Bad Symbol output is tied to the transition counter. If during a read cycle no symbol is decoded and the required setting for the Transition

Sample Threshold is met, a user defined message will be sent to the host.

Note: AGC (page

7-19

) must be disabled when this feature is used.

Bad Symbol Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K715,bad symbol

status

,bad symbol message>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Bad Symbol Message

Serial Cmd:

<

K715,

bad symbol status,

bad symbol message

>

Default:

BAD_SYMBOL

Options:

Up to 128 ASCII characters (except NUL)

The Bad Symbol output is tied to the transition counter. If during a read cycle no symbol is decoded and the required setting for the Transition

Sample Threshold is met, a user defined message will be sent to the host.

10-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

No Symbol Message

Note: No Symbol Message does not apply to multisymbol operations.

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in determining if an object has an attached symbol.

When enabled, sends a message to the host whenever an object is detected but no symbol is detected.

The No Symbol output is tied to the transition counter. If during a read cycle no symbol is decoded and the required setting for the Transition

Sample Threshold is NOT met, a user defined message will be sent to

the host. See

"Transition Counter"

on page 7-21.

Note: AGC (page

7-19

) must be disabled when this feature is used.

No Symbol Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K716,no symbol status

,no symbol message>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

No Symbol Message

Serial Cmd:

<

K716,

no symbol status,

no symbol message

>

Default:

NO_SYMBOL

Options:

Up to 128 ASCII characters (except NUL)

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-9

Output Indicators

Output Indicators

Green Flash Mode

Usage:

Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred.

Definition:

A green LED in the front of the reader can be programmed to flash briefly in response to user-defined conditions, or if in Static Presentation mode, illuminate for a set period of time.

Serial Cmd:

<

K750,green flash mode

,[unused],green flash duration>

Default:

Good Read

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Good Read

2 = Static Presentation

3 = Match

4 = Mismatch

Disabled

Green flash LEDs are disabled.

Good Read (Green Flash)

Green flash LEDs will flash for less than one second when a good read condition is meet or when matchcode is enabled and a match occurs.

Static Presentation (Green Flash)

Static Presentation is used in conjunction with Continuous Read mode.

When operating in Static Presentation mode, whenever the EZ trigger is pressed, the reader will search for a symbol in Continuous Read mode. When a symbol is placed in the FOV and a good read occurs, the green LED will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration.Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols.

Note: If Static Presentation mode is selected but the reader is not in Continuous

Read, Green Flash Mode will revert to the default Good Read.

To use Static Presentation:

1. Enable Continuous Read (see

"Trigger"

on page 3-6).

2. Select the number of symbols (see

"Multisymbol"

on page 7-4).

3. Enable Static Presentation in Green Flash Mode.

4. Select the read time in Green Flash Duration (see

"Green Flash Duration"

on page 10-11).

10-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Match (Green Flash)

Green flash LEDs will flash for less than 1 second when a match condition is met. If multisymbol is enabled, then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match. If matchcode is disabled, then this mode will activate the LED's on a good read.

Mismatch (Green Flash)

Same as On Match except it illuminates on a mismatch.

Green Flash Duration

Usage:

Definition:

A visual verification that a good read has occurred.

When a good read occurs, the Green flash LED's will illuminate and stay on for the time set for the Green Flash Duration value.

Serial Cmd:

<

K750,

green flash mode,[unused],

green flash duration

>

Default:

100

(1 second)

Options:

0 to 65535 (in 10mS increments)

Beeper Output Condition

Usage:

Definition:

Provides an audible verification that either a good read, noread or EZ

Button action has occurred.

A beep is emitted either after each good read of a symbol or after each noread, according to the Beeper Output Condition selection.

Note: Beeper will also sound if any of the following occur:

• the reader is defaulted a send/save command from ESP or an Exit command from any embedded menu.

• a

<Z>

,

<Zp>

,

<Zd>

, or

<K,1>

command is sent

Serial Cmd:

<

K702,beeper output

>

Default:

On Good Read

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = On Good Read 2 = On Noread

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-11

Serial Verification

Serial Verification

Usage:

These commands are useful in removing any doubt about the reader’s acceptance and response to host configuration commands.

For example, if the current preamble is “SOM” and

<Kd1, START>

is entered, the reader will echo back

<Kd1, SOM>

since the attempted entry “START” exceeds the four character limit for that command. Therefore it is rejected and the existing “SOM” message is echoed back and remains the preamble message.

Allows the user to verify configuration command status.

Definition:

Serial Command Echo Status

Important Note:

ESP will not function whenever this command is enabled.

Definition:

When enabled, a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the host with the resultant settings.

Host

Reader

Function:

If a command with multiple fields is processed, some of the fields may have been processed properly while others were not. The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change.

Serial Cmd:

<

K701,serial command echo status

,serial command beep status,control/hex output>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

10-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Serial Command Beep Status

Important:

ESP will not function whenever this command is enabled.

Usage:

Definition:

Function:

Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command.

Causes the reader to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed.

If an invalid command is entered, the reader beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry. However, this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly. Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response.

Serial Cmd:

<

K701,

serial command echo status,

serial command beep status

,con-

trol/hex output>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Control/Hex Output

Usage:

Definition:

Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial command on a terminal.

Determines the response to a Serial Command Echo or status request command.

When set to Control, two characters are transmitted to represent a nondisplayable character. For example, a carriage return will be shown as the two characters:

^M

.

When set to Hex, the output is the hex character.

Serial Cmd:

<

K701,

serial command echo status,serial command beep status,

control/hex output

>

Default:

Control

Options:

0 = Control 1 = Hex

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-13

EZ Button

EZ Button

See Chapter 3,

"EZ Button" for EZ Button options.

See Chapter 4,

"Calibration"

for Raster Framing and Laser Framing.

10-14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Input

Usage:

Definition:

For example, an application is setup so that a mismatch stops the production line by using outputs in a latch mode (see

"Output Mode (Output 1)"

on page 10-18). A push button switch can be connected to the input pin so that when pressed, it unlatches the output, allowing the line to resume operations.

A programmable, discrete input used to reset counters, outputs or control optoelectrical settings.

Serial Cmd:

<

K730,input mode

,active state>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Reset Counts 2 = Unlatch Output

Disabled

Definition:

When set to Disabled there is no effect on operation.

Reset Counts

Usage:

Definition:

Primarily used in test mode. Can also be used to reset counters daily.

When set to Reset Counts, a transition to the active state of the input will cause the reader to reset the internal counters (See

"Read Rate"

on page 15-3).

Unlatch Output

Definition:

This setting is used in combination with any of the three discrete outputs

that are in Unlatch Mode 1 (see

"Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch on Input

#1)"

on page 10-18). A transition to the active state will clear any of the three outputs that were previously latched.

Active State

Definition:

Determines the state at which inputs will react to input signals.

Serial Cmd:

<

K730,

input mode,

active state

>

Default:

Active Closed

Options:

0 = Active Open 1 = Active Closed

When set to Active Closed, the input function is activated when the input state is energized. When set to Active Open, the input function is activated when the input state is de-energized.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-15

Output 1

Output 1

Usage:

Definition:

Output On

This option provides switching to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays. It is useful for routing and sorting and to prevent mis-packaging and mis-routing.

Sets the discrete output functions for specific user-selected conditions.

Definition:

Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output pulse will occur to output 1.

Serial Cmd:

<

K810,output on

,active state,pulse width,output mode>

Default:

Mismatch or Noread

Options:

0 = Mismatch or Noread

1 = Match

2 = Mismatch

3 = Noread

4 = Trend Analysis

5 = Disabled

6 = Diagnostic Warning

7 = In Read Cycle

Note

:

If Output On is set to Mismatch or Noread, Match, or Mismatch, a transition

(switching) will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory.

Mismatch or Noread

Activates discrete output when the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle.

Match

Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol.

Note: If you want to output for a good read and Matchcode is not enabled, you can enable any output for Match.

Mismatch

Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol.

Noread

Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle.

10-16

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Trend Analysis

Tracks the occurrences and frequency of mismatches, noreads, and the number of decodes per trigger and output the results to output 1.

Disabled

No output.

Diagnostic Warning

Activates output 1 when a diagnostic warning condition is met. When enabled the Out-

put State and Pulse Width settings (

<K810>

pulse, latch...) have no affect on output. The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions persists. The output will go inactive whenever the warning condition no longer exists.

The output remains active as long as one of the diagnostic conditions is met.

In Read Cycle

Output is active during the read cycle.

Output State (Output 1)

Definition:

Sets the output state of the discrete output.

Serial Cmd:

<

K810,

output on,

output state

,pulse width,output mode>

Default:

Normally Open

Options:

0 = Normally Open 1 = Normally Closed

Pulse Width (Output 1)

Definition:

Sets the time in 10mS increments that the discrete output remains active.

Serial Cmd:

<

K810,

output on,output state,

pulse width

,output mode>

Default:

Options:

50 mS

(0.05 seconds)

1 to 65535 (0.01 to 65.535 seconds)

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-17

Output 1

Output Mode (Output 1)

Definition:

Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de-activated.

Serial Cmd:

<

K810,

output on,output state,pulse width,

output mode

>

Default:

Pulse

Options:

0 = Pulse

1 = Latch Mode 1

2 = Latch Mode 2

3 = Latch Mode 3

Pulse

Definition:

This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width.

Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch on Input #1)

Definition:

The programmable output goes active when the Output On condition is met and will remain active until the state of input #1 changes from inactive to active.

Important

: To unlatch using the EZ Button the button’s status must be set to unlatch mode. (See

"Unlatch Outputs"

on page 3-6.)

Latch Mode 2 (Unlatch Opposite Condition)

Definition:

The programmable output goes active when the Output On condition is met and will remain active until the opposite condition selected under

Output On occurs.

For example, if Noread is enabled under Output On, the programmable output will go active upon a noread and remain active until the opposite condition, a good read, occurs.

Latch Mode 3 (Unlatch Enter Read Cycle)

Definition:

The programmable output goes active when the Output On condition has been met and is held active until a new read cycle begins.

NOTE: All of the Output On modes are suppressed when any Output on Warning is active for Output 1 (see

<K780>

command).

10-18

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Trend Analysis (Output 1)

Usage:

Definition:

Example:

Useful in cases in which the user doesn’t want to shut down for a single condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions.

Applies trend analysis settings to Output 1.

With Trend Analysis, the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches, noreads, and the number of decodes per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs.

Trend analysis mode = Noread

Number to Output On = 4

Number of Triggers = 25

In this example, the reader will activate an output whenever 4 noreads occur within 25 triggers (read cycles).

With the exception of “Service threshold”, diagnostic outputs remain active as long as the diagnostic condition is detected.

Trend Analysis Mode

Definition:

Sets the trend condition (Mismatch, Noread, or Decodes/Trigger) that will activate the output.

Serial Cmd:

<

K780,trend analysis mode

,trigger evaluation period,number to out-

put on,decodes/trigger threshold>

Default:

Noread

Options:

0 = Mismatch 1 = Noread 2 = Decodes per Trigger

Mismatch

Definition:

Output will occur when the number of Mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in

Trigger Evaluation Period.

Noread

Definition:

Output will occur when the number of noreads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Trigger

Evaluation Period.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-19

Output 1

Trigger Evaluation Period

Definition:

The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition.

Serial Cmd:

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,

trigger evaluation period

,number to out-

put on,decodes/trigger threshold>

Default:

Options:

0

0 to 255

Number to Output On

Definition:

Usage:

Sets the number of Trend Analysis events (mismatches, noreads or decodes/trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode) to occur within the Number of Triggers before activating the associated output.

For example, if Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis

Mode is set to Noread, then the output will not occur until 3 noreads have occurred.

Serial Cmd:

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,

number to output on

,decodes/trigger threshold>

Default:

Options:

0

0 to 255

Decodes per Trigger

Definition:

Sets the threshold for the number of decodes required per trigger (read cycle) that must occur before an output can occur.

Serial Cmd:

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,

decodes/trigger threshold

>

Default:

Options:

0

0 to 65535

10-20

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Diagnostics (Output 1)

Note: With the exception of “Service threshold”, diagnostic outputs remain active as long as the diagnostic condition is detected.

Note: All warning outputs will remain active for at least one second.

Definition:

Usage:

Applies warning to Output 1. Sets up the destinations and specific warn-

ings that will cause activation. (See Chapter 12,

"Diagnostics"

, for more

information.)

Alerts user to critical conditions.

Over Temperature

Serial Cmd:

<

K790,over temperature

,service threshold,[unused],laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Service Threshold

Definition:

Activates the output whenever the service threshold has been met. Will output upon every occurrence of the threshold.

Serial Cmd:

<

K790,

over temperature,

service threshold

,[unused],laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Laser Current High

Definition:

Activates the output whenever the high current threshold has been met.

Will output once.

Serial Cmd:

<

K790,

over temperature,service threshold,[unused],

laser current high

,laser current low,low temp>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-21

Output 1

Laser Current Low

Definition:

Activates the output whenever the high current threshold has been met.

Will output once.

Serial Cmd:

<

K790,

over temperature,service threshold,[unused],laser current high,

laser current low

,low temp>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Low Temperature

Serial Cmd:

<

K790,

over temperature,service threshold,[unused],laser current

high,laser current low,

low temp

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

10-22

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Output 2

Serial Cmd:

<

K811,

output on,output state,pulse width,output mode>

Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1.

Trend Analysis (output 2)

Definition:

Applies trend analysis settings to Output 2.

Serial Cmd:

<

K781,

trend analysis mode,number of triggers,number to output

on,decodes/trigger threshold>

Trend Analysis to Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Trend

Analysis to Output 1.

Diagnostic Warnings (output 2)

Definition:

Applies diagnostic warnings to Output 2.

Serial Cmd:

<

K791,

over temperature,service threshold,unused,laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

Diagnostic Warnings to Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as

Diagnostic Warnings to Output 1.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-23

Output 3

Output 3

Serial Cmd:

<

K812,

output on,output state,pulse width,output mode>

Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1.

Trend Analysis (output 3)

Definition:

Applies trend analysis settings to Output 3.

Serial Cmd:

<

K782,

trend analysis mode,number of triggers,number to output

on,decodes/trigger threshold>

Trend Analysis to Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Trend

Analysis to Output 1.

Diagnostic Warnings (output 3)

Definition:

Applies diagnostic warnings to Output 3.

Serial Cmd:

<

K792,

over temperature,service threshold,unused,laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

Diagnostic Warnings to Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as

Diagnostic Warnings to Output 1.

10-24

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Quality Output

Usage:

Definition:

Host system can monitor scanning performance (printing process, scanning environment changes, etc.) by setting thresholds in their processing or displaying the outputs for visual verification.

Allows the host to track the number of good reads per trigger by appending a five digit numeric field to the end of symbol data.

When enabled, symbol data is followed by a separator, followed by the five digits in the form of 00000. For example, a certain symbol that has been averaging 00100 decodes per read cycle suddenly drops to 00012, this would be a good indication that a problem has arisen even though good reads are still occurring.

Quality Output Separator

Serial Cmd:

<

K704,quality output separator

,decodes/trigger status,decode direc-

tion status>

Default:

Options:

,

(comma)

Any ASCII character

Note: For all serial configuration commands, the following characters cannot be used:

,

<

,

>

, and

NULL.

Decodes/Trigger Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K704,

quality output separator,

decodes/trigger status

,decode direction status>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Decode Direction Output

Definition:

If enabled the decode direction is appended to the barcode output with a quality output separator as an “F” (forward) or an “R” (reverse).

Serial Cmd:

<

K704,

quality output separator,decodes/trigger status,

decode direction status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-25

Database Number Output

Database Number Output

When enabled the database number is appended to the data with a separator. The database number is formatted with a leading identifier of “

DB

” and the number is a zero padded 2 digit number.

Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K759,status

,separator>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Separator

Serial Cmd:

<

K759,s

tatus,

separator

>

Default:

(Space)

Options:

Any ASCII character except

,

<

,

>

, and

NULL.

Example

Assume a symbol with the data “HELLO” is read using database number 3 and the separator is set to space. The data output would be “HELLO DB03” assuming no other outputs or formatting were enabled. It is important to note that if the symbol is read with more than one database setting, the database number output will be associated with the first time the symbol is read.

10-26

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Symbol Position Output

The location and in some cases the size of a decoded symbol can be determined dynamically. When enabled, raster height and scan locations relative to the reader are calculated and appended to the symbol data output. In most linear symbologies, the actual width of the symbol is added to the scan line location.

Raster Status

Usage:

Definition:

Locates the decoded symbol in the raster position.

Locates the decoded symbol in the raster position (RP).

The raster position is a 3-digit number from 0 to 255 indicating the height of the raster line with 0 at the top when the reader is in the upright position as shown here.

Serial Cmd: <

K758,raster status

,scan status,separator>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

When enabled the location of the symbol within the raster pattern is appended to the symbol data output, with a separator. The raster position is formatted with a leading identifier of “

RP

” and the number is a zero padded 3 digit number in the form of

RPXXX

.

The raster location value corresponds to the configurable raster offsets in the

<K506>

command in

"Raster Setup"

on page 8-3.

Example

For example, assume a symbol with the data “HELLO” is read when the raster is at an offset of 053, and the separator is set as a space.

The data output would be “HELLO RP053” assuming no other outputs or formatting is enabled.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-27

Symbol Position Output

Scan Status

Usage:

Definition:

Locates the decoded symbol in the scan position.

Locates the decoded symbol in the scan position

(SP).

The scan position is a 3-digit number from 0 to

100 indicating the nearest point from the upper or lower extremity of the symbol to the nearest edge of the entire scan width.

Serial Cmd: <

K758,

raster status,

scan position

,separator>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

When enabled the location of the symbol within the scan line is appended to the symbol data output, with a separator. The scan position is formatted with a leading identifier of

SP

” plus two zero-padded three digit numbers (corresponding to the first and last bar of the symbol for most symbologies), separated by a colon in the form of:

SPXXX:YYY

The scan position values correspond to the configurable laser on/off position values in the

<K700>

command.

XXX

is the position of the first bar of the symbol

YYY

is the position of the last bar, the ranges being 0 to 100.

Note: the scan width data is calculated from the beginning of the full scan width, not the partial or auto-framed width.

Example

Assume a symbol with the data “HELLO” is read when its first bar is at 20% of the scan width. The width of the symbol is 13% of the scan line

The data output would be “HELLO SP020:033” assuming no other outputs or formatting is enabled.

10-28

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters

Symbol Position Separator

Definition:

Inserts a user-defined character between the decoded data and the symbol position data.

Serial Cmd: <

K758,

raster status,scan position,

separator

>

Default:

Space

Options:

Any ASCII character.

Raster/Scan Position by Symbology Type

Symbology

Code 39

Code 128

I2of5

Codabar

Code 93

Pharma Code

RSS Limited

UPC

UPC, supplemental enabled, and both main and supplemental symbols are decoded

UPC, supplemental required

PDF417

MicroPDF

RSS14

RSS Expanded

RSS Stacked

Composite

Timing

Position information is from the first decode of the symbol.

Symbol position from subsequent decodes of the same symbol is ignored.

Raster position

Location of raster when symbol was decoded the first time.

Location of symbol within the scan line of the first decode.

Scan position

Position values may come from different scans and symbols:

Main symbol: First decode.

Supplemental: The scan in which both the main and supplemental are decoded.

When both symbols decode in the same scan line.

Position values are averaged over several scan lines in which a codeword is decoded.

Position values are for the last scan which allows the symbol to fully decode.

Position values may be mixed from either the linear or 2D component, and may come from different scans.

The most extreme position (closest to the top or bottom of the raster pattern) of either the main or supplemental.

Location of the raster when the symbols were decoded.

The average raster position will correspond to the approximate

“middle” of the symbol.

The position of the raster when the symbol fully decodes.

The most extreme position (closest to the top or bottom of the raster pattern) of either the linear component or 2D component.

The most extreme position (closest to the edge of scan) from either the main or supplemental.

First bar and last bar position values may come from different symbols and scans.

Note: At least one position value is from the first decode of the main symbol. The other two values may be from the supplemental. There is no indication as to which position value corresponds to which symbol, but some assumptions can be made if the symbols are moving in a ladder orientation.

The most extreme position (closest to the edge of scan) from either the main or supplemental.

First bar and last bar position come from different symbols but the SAME scan.

Average first and last bar position.

Note: If the symbol is moving “fast”, position information may tend to “converge” toward the middle of the raster pattern and scan line. First and last bar positions will not correlate to row width.

These symbologies can sometimes be decoded even when the scan line does not cross all elements in one sweep. Therefore, the position information corresponds to the position of the last scanned element that allows the symbol to fully decode.

This is a single point, and therefore, the scan position data is the same for both the first and last bar. Example: SP043:043.

The most extreme position (closest to the edge of scan) from either the linear component or 2D component. First bar and last bar position values may come from different symbols and scans.

If both the linear and 2D component are both single-point scan positions (example: RSS+

MicroPDF), then the net scan position will also be a single point.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

10-29

Read Duration Output

Read Duration Output

Definition:

When enabled the duration (in milliseconds) from when the read cycle started until the symbol data is output is appended to the data with a separator. It is important to note that when in level mode if the user wishes to measure the entire length of the trigger pulse the user needs to set the When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle. This will prevent the read duration from being shorter than the entire read cycle in the event you qualify the symbol requirements for output before the trigger becomes inactive. This output has the capability of measuring over

49 days worth of duration, if exceeded the message “OVERFLOW” will be output in place of the duration.

Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K706,status

,separator>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Separator

Definition:

Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the separator.

Serial Cmd:

<

K706,

status,

separator

>

Default:

Options:

(Space)

Any ASCII character.

Separator can be set to any ASCII characters except

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

.

10-30

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

11

Matchcode

Chapter Contents

Matchcode by ESP....................................................................................11-2

Matchcode by Serial Command ................................................................11-2

Overview of Matchcode.............................................................................11-3

Using Master Symbols...............................................................................11-3

Matchcode Type........................................................................................11-4

Sequential Matching..................................................................................11-5

Match Start Position ..................................................................................11-6

Match Length.............................................................................................11-7

Wild Card Character..................................................................................11-8

Sequence On Noread................................................................................11-9

Sequence On Mismatch ..........................................................................11-10

Sequence Step........................................................................................11-11

New Master Pin .......................................................................................11-11

Match Replace ........................................................................................11-12

Mismatch Replace...................................................................................11-13

This section explains the matchcode output functions and the master symbol database setup.

Note: When assigning characters in user-defined fields, the characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

,

Note: You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number, as in

<K100?>

. To see all “

K

” commands, send

<K?>

.

11-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Matchcode by ESP

Matchcode by ESP

Click this button to bring up the

Matchcode

menu.

To change a setting,

double-click

the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options.

To open nested options,

single-click

the +.

Matchcode by Serial Command

Matchcode Type

Sequence Step

New Master Pin

Master Symbol

Database Size

Match Replace

Mismatch Replace

Matchcode

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on

mismatch>

<

K228,

sequence step>

<

K225,

status>

<

K224,

number of master symbols>

<

K735,

status,message>

<

K735,

status,message>

11-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Matchcode

Overview of Matchcode

Usage:

Definition:

Matchcode is used in applications to sort, route, or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section. For example, a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol.

With Matchcode you can store master symbol data in the reader’s memory, compare this data against the scanned symbols, and define how symbol data and/or discrete signal output will be directed. A master sym-

bol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols. See

"Master

Symbol Database"

on page 15-8.

Using Master Symbols

1. Set Triggering Mode to

External

or

Serial

(see

"Trigger Mode"

on page 7-6).

2. Chose the method of symbol comparison that fits your application (see

"Matchcode

Type"

on page 11-4).

3. Define the output you want with your matchcode setup:

a) Symbol output (

"Symbol Data Output Status"

on page 10-4).

b) Discrete output (see Chapter 10,

"I/O Parameters"

).

4. Select the number of master symbols you want to create, if more than one (see

"Number of Master Symbols"

on page 15-9).

5. Enter master symbol data in one of the following ways: a) Use ESP to type in master symbol data directly into the Utilities menu.

b) Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of

<Mmaster sym-

bol#,data>

(or

<)data)>

for single master symbol only). c) Send a

<Gmaster symbol number>

command to scan next symbol in as the master symbol.

d) Enable the

New Master Pin

command and activate a discrete input to store

the next symbol scanned as the master symbol (see

"Sequence Step"

on

page 11-11).

See also

"Number of Master Symbols"

on page 15-9 for more information details on entering, requesting, and deleting master symbols.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

11-3

Matchcode Type

Matchcode Type

Note: When Matchcode is set to Enabled, Wild Card or Sequential, Number of

Symbols will default back to

1

(if set to any number greater than 1).

Definition:

Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently scanned symbols.

Note: First set Triggering Mode to

External

or

Serial

.

Serial Cmd:

<

K223,matchcode type

,sequential matching,match start position, match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on mis-

match>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Sequential

3 = Wild Card

Disabled:

Enabled:

Sequential

Matching:

Wild Card:

Has no effect on operations.

Instructs the reader to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol.

Instructs the reader to sequence after each match (numeric only) and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numbers.

Note: If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential, Number of Symbols will default back to 1 (if set to any number greater than 1).

Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol.

11-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Matchcode

Sequential Matching

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially.

With Sequential enabled, Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending (incremental) or descending (decremental) order.

Serial Cmd:

<

K223,

matchcode type,

sequential matching

,match start position, match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on mis-

match>

Default:

Increment

Options:

0 = Increment 1 = Decrement

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

11-5

Match Start Position

Match Start Position

Usage:

Definition:

Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparisons. For example, if a symbol contains a part number, manufacturing date, and lot code info but the user is only interested in the part number information, Match Start Position can be set to only sort on the part number and ignore the rest of the characters.

Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol (from left to right) that will be compared with those of the master symbol, when Matchcode

Type is set to Enabled or Sequential.

Function:

For example, if Match Start Position is set to 3, the first 2 characters read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared, up to the number of characters specified by Match Length.

Serial Cmd:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,

match start position

, match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on mis-

match>

Default:

0

Options:

0 to 2710

Note: Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature. A 0 setting will disable this feature.

11-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Matchcode

Match Length

Usage:

Definition:

For example, if Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol, and

Match Start Position is set for 2, only the 2nd through 7th characters

(from left to right) will be compared.

Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater.

When Match Start Position is set to 0, no comparison will occur.

Serial Cmd:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,

match length

,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on mis-

match>

Default:

Options:

1

1 to 2710

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

11-7

Wild Card Character

Wild Card Character

Usage:

For example, with Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk, defining

CR*34

as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134,

CR234, but not CR2345. Entering the wild card at the end of the master symbol as in

CR***

will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1, CR23, CR358, etc. provided that the number of wild card characters matches or exceeds the number of characters present.

Definition:

Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol.

Serial Cmd:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position, match length,

wild card character

,sequence on noread,sequence on

mismatch>

Default:

Options:

*

(asterisk)

Any valid ASCII character

11-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Matchcode

Sequence On Noread

Usage:

Definition:

Sequence On Noread is useful when the reader needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs.

When Sequence On Noread is Enabled and Matchcode is set to

Sequential, the reader sequences the master symbol on every match or noread. When disabled, it does not sequence on a noread.

Serial Cmd:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position, match length,wild card character,

sequence on noread

,sequence on

mismatch>

Default:

Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

As an example of Sequence on Noread

Enabled

, consider the following series of decodes:

Master symbol

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

Decoded symbol

001

002 noread

004 noread noread

007

Master symbol after decode

002

003

004 (sequenced on noread)

005

006 (sequenced on noread)

007 (sequenced on noread)

008

As an example of Sequence on Noread

Disabled

, consider the following series of decodes:

Master symbol

001

002

003

003

004

004

004

Decoded symbol

001

002 noread

003 noread noread

004

Master symbol after decode

002

003

003 (not sequenced)

004

004 (not sequenced)

004 (not sequenced)

005

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

11-9

Sequence On Mismatch

Sequence On Mismatch

Note: Matchcode must be set to Sequential for this command to function.

Usage:

Definition:

Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur.

Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur.

When set to Enabled, the master symbol sequences on every decode, match or mismatch.

When set to Disabled, the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur.

Serial Cmd:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position, match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,

sequence on mismatch

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

The reader will sequence the master to one more/less than the decoded symbol. As an example of Sequence On Mismatch

Enabled

, consider the following decodes:

Master symbol

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

Decoded symbol

001

002 abc

004 def ghi

007

Master symbol after decode

002

003

004 (sequenced on mismatch)

005

006 (sequenced on mismatch)

007 (sequenced on mismatch)

008

As an example of Sequence On Mismatch

Disabled

, consider the following decodes:

Master symbol

001

002

003

004

005

006

006

Decoded symbol

001

002 abc

004 def ghi

006

Master symbol after decode

002

003

004 (sequenced because of previous match)

005

006 (sequenced because of previous match)

006 (not sequenced because of previous mismatch)

007

11-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Matchcode

Sequence Step

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in applications in which it is desirable to count by intervals other than 1.

Sequencing in Matchcode operations can occur in steps from 1 to

32,768.

Sequencing performs like a mechanical counter by displaying positive integers and a specific number of digits after roll-overs. For example, 000

– 3 = 997 (not –3) and 999 + 3 = 002 (not 1002).

Serial Cmd:

<

K228,sequence step

>

Default:

1

Options:

0 - 32768

New Master Pin

Usage:

Definition:

Some applications require the line worker to change the master symbol.

This can be done by installing a switch at the location of the reader. It is very common to have a keyed switch so that accidental switching does not occur.

After New Master Pin is enabled, a pulse can be received on the new master pin which will cause the reader to record the next decoded symbol(s) as the new master symbol(s).

It is important to note that the enabling New Master Pin does not in itself cause a master symbol to be recorded. The master pin must then be activated momentarily (for a minimum of 10 mS) before a master

symbol can be scanned into memory. (See

"Electrical Specifications"

on page A-4.)

Serial Cmd:

<

K225,status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

After New Master Pin has been enabled and the pin activated, decodes will be saved in the master database beginning with master symbol #1. If the reader is configured for a multisymbol read cycle (Number of Symbols is greater than 1), the remaining decodes will be saved in each consecutive master symbol location. For example, if

Number of Symbols is set to 3 and New Master Pin is then activated, at the end of the next read cycle, the decoded symbols will be saved as master symbols 1, 2, and 3.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

11-11

Match Replace

Match Replace

Status

Usage:

Definition:

Useful when a user-defined message is needed in place of the match code message.

When enabled, the Match Replace message is output instead of the bar code data when a match occurs.

Serial Cmd:

<

K735,status,

message>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: In addition to enabling Match Replace, you will need to have done the following:

1. Enable a triggered read cycle in

"Trigger"

on page 7-6.

2. Enable

"Matchcode Type"

on page 11-4.

3. Enable

"Symbol Data Output"

on page 10-4.

Match Replacement Message

Definition:

Creates the ASCII string that will replace the configured master symbol data that is read whenever a match occurs.

Serial Cmd:

<

K735,status,

message>

Default:

MATCH

Options:

1 to 128 valid ASCII characters

11-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Matchcode

Mismatch Replace

Status

Usage:

Definition:

Useful when a user-defined message is needed in place of the mismatch code message.

When enabled, the Mismatch Replace message is output instead of the bar code data when a mismatch occurs.

Serial Cmd:

<

K736,status,

message>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: In addition to enabling Mismatch Replace, you will need to have done the following:

1. Enable a triggered read cycle in

"Trigger"

on page 7-6.

2. Enable

"Matchcode Type"

on page 11-4.

3. Enable

"Symbol Data Output"

on page 10-4.

Mismatch Replacement Message

Definition:

Creates the ASCII string that will replace the configured master symbol data that is read whenever a mismatch occurs.

Serial Cmd:

<

K736,

status,

message

>

Default:

MATCH

Options:

1 to 128 valid ASCII characters

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

11-13

Mismatch Replace

11-14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Diagnostics

Chapter Contents

Diagnostics by ESP .................................................................................. 12-2

Diagnostics by Serial Command ............................................................... 12-2

Diagnostic Messages Overview................................................................ 12-3

Counts....................................................................................................... 12-4

Hours Since Last Reset ............................................................................ 12-6

Laser High................................................................................................. 12-7

Laser Low ................................................................................................. 12-8

High Temperature ..................................................................................... 12-9

Low Temperature...................................................................................... 12-9

Service Message .................................................................................... 12-10

This section describes warning and operating messages and their settings.

Important: Since Warning Messages and NOVRAM Messages are not enabled by default, these messages will not be displayed. However, if you suspect that erroneous defaults are occurring, enable Warning Messages and NOVRAM Messages by sending

<K”400,1,,,1>

.

Note: When assigning characters in user-defined fields, the characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

Note: You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number, as in

<K100?>

. To see all “

K

” commands, send

<K?>

.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

12-1

Diagnostics by ESP

Diagnostics by ESP

Click this button to bring up the

Diagnostic

menu.

To open nested options,

single-click

the +.

To change a setting,

double-click

the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options.

Diagnostics by Serial Command

Power-on/Resets Counts

Hours Since Reset

Warning Messages

Laser High/Laser Low

High Temperature

Low Temperature

Service Message

Diagnostics

< K406,?

> returns: <K406,power-on,resets,power-on saves,custom

default saves> (read only)

< K407?

> returns: <K407,hours,minutes>

<

K400,

warning message status,laser high status,laser low sta-

tus,novram/reset warning status>

<

K411,

laser high status,laser high message,laser low status,laser low message>

<

K402,

high temperature status,high temperature message>

<

K403,

low temperature status,low temperature message>

<

K409,

status,service message,threshold,resolution>

12-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Diagnostics

Diagnostic Messages Overview

Usage:

Definition:

These messages serve as a flag to service a scanner or as an early warning that potential problems could arise. They are particularly useful in factories that run 24/7 and can’t afford down time.

Warning messages that relate to the environment and condition of the scanner can be defined and set to activate specific outputs.

Note: When enabled, the error condition will override all other operational modes configured for the output.

When enabled, laser current and NOVRAM warning messages will be transmitted to the host or any active port whenever the pre-defined conditions are met.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

12-3

Counts

Counts

(These commands are READ ONLY.)

Sending

<K406?>

returns a four fields of data, as follows:

<

K406,

power-on,resets,power-on saves,customer default saves>

Power-on Count

Usage:

Definition

Useful for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems or ESD transients.

Returns the number of times the scanner has been re-powered.

Serial Cmd:

Send <

K406?

>

Returns <

K406,power-on

,resets,power-on saves,custom default

saves>

Read Only

Ranges:

0 to 65,535 resets.

Resets

Usage:

Definition

Useful for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems or ESD transients.

Returns Resets for all the “warm” resets, including

<A>

,

<Ard>

,

<Arp>

and

<Arc>

.

Serial Cmd:

Send

<K406?>

Returns <

K406,

power-on,

resets

,power-on saves,custom default

saves>

Read Only

Ranges:

0 to 65,535 resets.

12-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Diagnostics

Power-on Saves

Usage:

Definition

Useful for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems or ESD transients.

Returns the number of times the scanner saves for the power-on resets, including

<Z>

,

<Zrd>

.

Serial Cmd:

Send

<K406?>

Read Only

Ranges:

Returns <

K406,

power-on,resets,

power-on saves

,custom default

saves>

0 to 65,535 power-on saves.

Customer Default Saves

Usage:

Definition

Useful for detecting unwanted resets caused by power supply problems or ESD transients.

Returns the number of customer default saves:

<Zc>

.

Serial Cmd:

Send

<K406?>

Returns <

K406,

power-on,resets,power-on saves,

custom default saves

>

Read Only

Ranges:

0 to 65,535 custom default saves.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

12-5

Hours Since Last Reset

Hours Since Last Reset

(This command is READ ONLY.)

Usage:

Definition:

Useful as a troubleshooting tool that can help pinpoint the cause of a reset.

Records the number of hours and minutes of operation since the last system reset.

Serial Cmd:

Send

<K407?>

Returns

<K407,hours,minutes>

Read Only

Ranges:

0 to 23 hours, 0 to 59 minutes.

12-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Diagnostics

Laser High

When enabled, a message is transmitted whenever the laser current exceeds a factorycalibrated reference value which cannot be altered. The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected.

Laser High Status

Usage:

Definition:

Alerts the user to impending laser failure. (Contact Service.)

Enables the Laser High message.

Serial Cmd: <

K411,laser high status

,laser high message,laser low status,laser low message>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Laser High Message

Definition:

Defines the Laser High message.

Serial Cmd: <

K411,

laser high status,

laser high message

,laser low status,laser low message>

Default:

Options:

HIGH-LASER

Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except

NULL

,

<

, or

>

.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

12-7

Laser Low

Laser Low

When enabled, a message is transmitted whenever the laser current falls below a factory-calibrated reference value which cannot be altered. The message repeats once every 30 minutes until the condition is corrected.

Laser Low Status

Usage:

Definition:

Alerts the user to impending laser failure. (Contact Service.)

Enables the Laser Low message.

Serial Cmd: <

K411,

laser high status,laser high message,

laser low status

,laser low message>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Laser Low Message

Definition:

Defines the Laser Low message.

Serial Cmd: <

K411,

laser high status,laser high message,laser low status,

laser low message

>

Default:

Options:

LOW-LASER

Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except

NULL

,

<

, or

>

.

12-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Diagnostics

High Temperature

High Temperature Status

Serial Cmd: <

K402,high temperature status

,high temperature message>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

High Temperature Message

Serial Cmd: <

K402,

high temperature status,

high temperature message

>

Default:

HIGH_TEMP

Options:

Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except

NULL

,

<

, or

>

.

Low Temperature

Low Temperature Status

Serial Cmd: <

K403,low temperature status

,low temperature message>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Low Temperature Message

Serial Cmd: <

K403,

low temperature status,

low temperature message

>

Default:

HIGH_TEMP

Options:

Any 1 to 10 character ASCII string except

NULL

,

<

, or

>

.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

12-9

Service Message

Service Message

Definition:

The service timer is reset on power-on. Thus the timer only records the time that has elapsed since the last reset.

The message is sent every time the timer expires.

Service Message Status

Definition:

When enabled, a message is sent whenever the system detects that a user-set service time has expired.

Serial Cmd:

<

K409,status

,service message,threshold,resolution>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Service Message

Serial Cmd:

<

K409,

status,

service message

,threshold,resolution>

Default:

SERVICE

Options:

Any 1 to 10 ASCII characters except

NULL < ,

or

>

.

Threshold

Definition:

Sets the number of hours or minutes that will transpire before the Service message is output.

Serial Cmd:

<

K409,

status,service message,

threshold

,resolution>

Default:

Options:

300

(seconds or minutes as set in Resolution)

2 to 65,535

Resolution

Definition:

Records time in seconds or minutes.

Serial Cmd:

<

K409,

status,service message,threshold,

resolution

>

Default:

Seconds

Options:

0 = Seconds 1 = Minutes

12-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

13

Output Format

Chapter Contents

Output Format by ESP ..............................................................................13-2

Output Format by Serial Command...........................................................13-2

Output Format Overview ...........................................................................13-3

Extraction Mode ........................................................................................13-4

Insertion Mode...........................................................................................13-6

Multisymbol Output Format Status ............................................................13-8

Ordered Output .......................................................................................13-10

This section has instructions for assigning formatting rules that determine what portions of a symbol will be read and the specific sequence and data that will be inserted in the output.

Note: The characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

Note: See Chapter 12,

"Diagnostics"

for definitions and setup of Diagnostic Warnings.

13-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Output Format by ESP

Output Format by ESP

Click

this button to bring up the Output Format menu.

Output Format by Serial Command

Output Format Status

Extraction Mode

Insertion Mode

Multisymbol Output

Ordered Output

Number of Filters

Output Format

<

K743,

output format status>

<

K740,

output #,start position,length>

<

K741,

output #,length,hex string>

<

K742,

symbol number,status>

<

K744,

filter index,symbology type,length,wildcard character,placeholder

character,data,decode direction,check database number>

<

K745,

number of filters involved>

13-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Output Format

Output Format Overview

Output Format consists of a set of criteria expressed in Extraction and Insertion serial or ESP menu commands that can be chained together to control the presentation of data that is transmitted from decoded symbols. If a symbol does not meet the defined criteria, it is treated as a noread.

Note that Extraction and Insertion functions are independent of Ordered Output criteria. The output format control can also work with all standard read modes such as

Matchcode, Multisymbol etc.

Commands can be chained together in an array of as many as 100 steps and applied to any symbol.

Output Format Status

Definition:

ESP:

Output Format Status is a “master switch” that controls Output For-

mat. Extraction and/or Insertion commands must be defined before an output occurs.

When you set up Output Format in the ESP Output Format menu and click on Apply in the same menu, Output Format Status will be changed to Enable in the reader and displayed as such in the Outputs configuration menu after you send a Retrieve Reader Settings command.

You can also enable/disable Output Format from the Outputs menu by double-clicking on Output Format.

Serial Cmd:

<

K743,output format status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Note: Output Format Status must be enabled in order for any Output Format commands to function.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

13-3

Extraction Mode

Extraction Mode

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in scanning symbols in which only a portion or portions of the symbol data needs to be transmitted and sorted.

Selects a portion of the symbol data to be transmitted and ignores the rest.

Extraction by ESP

1. Click

Read

Symbol

. This will display in the current symbol data under Original.

Reader test label 1-1-06

2. Select text to be extracted.

Reader

3. Click

Extract

The extracted selected text will appear in this field.

4. Click

Apply

or proceed with additional extractions and insertions.

5. Click

Test.

Note: When you click

Apply

, Symbol

#1 in Symbol Output Format Status window will automatically be enabled.

Output Format Extraction

After selecting and entering the extracted portion or portions of a symbol, you can proceed to Insertion mode where user-selectable ASCII text can be inserted. You can perform up to 100 instances of extraction and insertion for all symbols being scanned in the read cycle.

See

"Multisymbol Output Format Status"

on page 13-8.

13-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Output Format

Extraction by Serial Command

Output #

Definition:

An Output # identifies the step involved in an output format process. For example, if the routine involves a series of four Extraction and/or

Insertion steps, each of these steps is controlled by assigning sequential output numbers from 1 to 4.

ESP:

Output # appears in the Advanced Formatting tab.

Serial Cmd:

<

K740,output #

,start position,length>

Default:

Options:

(none) Must be entered.

1 to 100

Start Position

Definition:

Specifies the precise character in the data sequence (from left to right) where the selection for output begins.

Serial Cmd:

<

K740,

output #,

start position

,length>

Default:

0

(Zero is disabled. It also marks the end of a format cell array.)

Options:

0 to maximum characters per symbol (0 is disabled)

Length

Definition:

Specifies the length of the output string.

Serial Cmd:

<

K740,

output #,start position,

length

>

Default:

Options:

0

0 to maximum characters per symbol (0 is disabled)

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

13-5

Insertion Mode

Insertion Mode

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in adding designators or separators to add meaning or content to data in applications where symbol data needs to be sorted.

Inserts up to four characters at a time into a data output string. You can add additional characters by repeating the procedure.

Insertion by ESP

Up to 4 ASCII characters can be inserted at any point in symbol input and added to the output. After scanning a symbol and selecting the original characters for extraction, as

shown in

"Extraction by ESP"

on page 13-4, do the following:

1. Click

Insert.

2. Type in text to be inserted or select ASCII character from the ASCII selector and click

OK

.

This will append the insertion to the end of the extracted data under Format.

SP 1-1-06

You can now add another extraction from the original followed by an insertion and another extraction in any sequence that you want it to appear upon output.

3. Click on

Apply

when all insertions and extractions are completed.

4. Click on

Test

to see resulting output.

13-6

Output Format Insertion

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Output Format

Insertion by Serial Command

Output #

Definition:

An Output # identifies the step involved in an output format process. For example, if the Output Format routine involved a series of four Extrac-

tion and/or Insertion steps, each of these steps is controlled by assigning sequential output numbers from 1 to 4.

Serial Cmd:

<

K741,output #

,length,hex string>

Default:

(none) Must be entered.

Options:

1 to 100

Length

Definition:

Specifies the length of the output string.

Serial Cmd:

<

K741,

output #,

length

,hex string>

Default:

Options:

0

(A zero disables Length or can mark the end of a format cell array.)

0 to 4 (0 is disabled)

Hex String

Definition:

A pair of hex digits represent an ASCII character. Each pair of hex digits ranges from 00 to FF. Each hex string has a maximum of 4 pairs.

For example, hex 65 = ‘e’, 6e = ‘n’, 64 = ‘d’, thus 656e64 = “end”

Serial Cmd:

<

K741,

output #,length,

hex string

>

Default:

00

Options:

00 to FF

Output Format Examples by Serial Command

A symbol with the data

ABCDEFGH

needs to be manipulated to output:

DEFGH@$ABCend

.

The following commands are sent to achieve this setup:

<K740,1,4,5>

for extraction mode, output# =1, start position = 4, length = 5.

<K741,2,2,4024>

for insertion mode, output# = 2, length = 2, hex string = 4024.

Note that the hex pairs 40 and 24 = @$ in ASCII.

<K740,3,1,3>

for extraction mode, output# = 3, start position = 1, length = 3.

<K741,4,3,656e64>

for insertion mode, output # = 4, length = 3, hex string =

656e64

Note that 656e64 = “end”.

<K741,0>

This ends the sequence and could have been done with a 740 command, as well.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

13-7

Multisymbol Output Format Status

Multisymbol Output Format Status

Symbol Output Format Status corresponds directly with symbols setup in Multisym-

bol. If Number of Symbols in Multisymbol is set to the default 1, then only Symbol #1

in Symbol Output Format Status will be enabled. See

"Multisymbol"

on page 7-4.

Multisymbol Number

Usage:

Definition:

Allows the user to set up as many symbols that are already assigned in

Multisymbol for output and filter formatting.

Specifies the symbol in a multisymbol operation to which output format status is being applied.

Serial Cmd:

<

K742,symbol number

,status>

Options:

1 to 12, as applicable to symbol number.

Output Format Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K742,

symbol number,

status

>

Default:

Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Enabled means output format control is assigned to a symbol number specified in the first field; for example

<K742,9,1>

enables symbol number 9.

13-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Output Format Status by ESP

Note: Multisymbol Output Format Status table is found on the right side of the Output Format tab in the Output Format menu.

Click on checkbox to enable or disable.

Output Format

Multisymbol Output Format

Status

Special Rules for Using Multisymbol with Output Format

1. Unless you want to assign output formatting to more than one symbol at a time in your multisymbol sequence, disable all symbols except the one to which you are applying the output formatting.

2. The 12 symbols in Multisymbol Output Format Status correspond to multisymbols; the 12 filters in Ordered Output apply only to the order of output and have no relationship to Multisymbol or Symbol Output Format Status.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

13-9

Ordered Output

Ordered Output

Usage:

Definition:

Useful in sorting several symbols into multiple categories with specific fields and a defined order of output.

Ordered Output involves filtering and ordering.

In the filtering stage, each symbol in a read cycle is read and matched against a user-defined database of up to 12 filters which search on symbology type, symbol length and data contents. A given symbol must meet all three criteria in any one of the filters in order to be included.

In the ordering stage, symbols are transmitted in the order that they match up with the filters. A symbol matching filter #1 will transmit first, another matching filter #2 will transmit next, and so forth.

Rule #1

Each symbol decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record. However, an exception exists whenever the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters. In this case, unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions. For example, if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 4 active filters, the last 2 positions can be filled by any

(un-filtered) qualified symbol.

Rule #2

The user can use the same filter setup multiple times. For example, if filters 1, 2, & 3 are setup to filter on Data Matrix symbol type and in the order that they are decoded, qualified Data Matrix symbols will be output in filters 1,2 & 3 positions.

Rule #3

All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the filter position they match. If a symbol matches filter 3, it will be output as the 3rd symbol. If a filter does not have a symbol qualified for it, a NOREAD message will be output in place of the symbol (if

Noread message is enabled). For example, if filter 3 does not have a symbol that meets it's requirements, a NOREAD message will be output in the 3rd output position.

13-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Output Format

Ordered Output by ESP

• Click on the Ordered Output tab.

Use this option to specify the symbol type.

Specify the symbol length.

Set

Number of Filters

.

Double-click

on a row to bring up the popup below for filter #1.

Type in data that you want the symbol to match.

Click

Send

or

Send and Save

to send settings to the reader.

• Select the Number of Filters (1 to 6).

• Double-click on the filter number you wish to define.

• In the Ordered Output Filter Settings you can select from the fields shown and add text to be matched, wild cards, etc.

• Click

Apply

to add to the Ordered Output table.

• Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each additional filter.

• Click

Send

to save to current memory or

Send and Save

to save for power-on.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

13-11

Ordered Output

Ordered Output by Serial Command

Filter Index

Definition:

The filter sequence number from 1 to 12

Serial Cmd:

<

K744,filter index

,symbology type,length,wildcard character,place-

holder character,data,decode direction,check database number>

Default:

Options:

0

(0 = disabled)

Range 0 to 12

Symbology Type

Definition:

User-assigned symbology type that the reader will search for.

If a match is found, the reader then checks Length.

Serial Cmd:

<

K744,

filter index,

symbology type

,length,wildcard character,place-

holder character,data,decode direction,check database number>

Default:

0

Options:

0 = Any type

1 = I-2/5

2 = code 39

3 = code 128

4 = Codabar

5 = UPC

6 = PDF417

7 = EAN 128

8 = Code 93

9 = Pharmacode

10 = RSS

11 = MicroPDF

12 = Composite

Symbol Length

Definition:

User-assigned symbol length that the reader will search for.

If the length is found, the reader then checks Wild Card.

Serial Cmd:

<

K744,

filter index,symbology type,

length

,wildcard character,place-

holder character,data,decode direction,check database number>

Default:

Options:

0

(0 = any length)

0 to 128

13-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Output Format

Wildcard Character

Definition:

Wildcard Character indicates that any number of characters that follow the wildcard will be regarded as matches.

For example, “

123*

” will match “123”, “123456”, “123ABC”, but not “12”.

Filter data ”

123*AB?C

” will be interpreted as “123*”

Serial Cmd:

<

K744,

filter index,symbology type,length,

wildcard character

,place-

holder character,data,decode direction,check database number>

Default:

Options:

Both Wildcard Character and Placeholder Character can be mixed in the same filter data.

*

= 2A

Any pairings of hex digits representing an ASCII character; for example, 2A = *

(00 = disabled)

Placeholder Character

Definition:

Placeholder Character is a type of wild card that requires identical data position.

For example, Filter data “

123?

”, will match all of the “1234”, “123A”, but not “123”, “12345”, “1234C”.

Filter data “

123?A

” will match “1234A” and “123BA”, but not “123”,

“1234C” or “1234ABCD”

Both Wildcard Character and Placeholder Character can be mixed in the same filter data.

Serial Cmd:

<

K744,

filter index,symbology type,length,wildcard character,

placeholder character

,data,decode direction,check database number>

Default:

?

= 3F

Options:

Any ASCII input as pair of hex digit; e.g., 3F=’?’

(00 = disabled)

Wildcard/Placeholder Matches

Both Wildcard Character and Placeholder Character can be mixed in the same filter data.

You can regard wildcard marks as the end of matching, whereas a placeholder requires identical data both before and after the placeholder.

For example:

Filter data “

123*

” matches “123”, “123456”, “123ABC” but not “12”.

Filter data “

123*AB?C

” will be interpreted as “123*”

Filter data “

123?A?

” matches “1234AB”, “123BAT”, but not “1234A” or “123BATS”.

Filter data “

12??*

” matches “1234”, “123456”, “123ABC”, but not “12”, “123”.

Filter data “

123?A*

” matches “1234A”, “123BA”, “123BATS”, but not “1234”, “1234C”.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

13-13

Ordered Output

Data

Definition:

Serial Cmd:

<

K744,

filter index,symbology type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,

data

,decode direction,check database number>

Default:

Options:

User-assigned data that the reader will search for.

Null

Any pairing of hex digits representing ASCII characters; e.g., 41422A = “AB*”

(00 = disabled)

Decode Direction

Definition:

The current symbol decode direction is compared with the direction of the filter. If decode direction comparison succeeded then move to the next item.

Serial Cmd:

<

K744,

filter index,symbology type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data,

decode direction

,check database number>

Default:

Any Direction

Options:

0 = Any direction 1 = Forward 2 = Reverse

Check Index

Definition:

The configuration database of the first decode of a symbol is compared with the filter indexes, as enabled. If a match occurs, the current symbol is a qualified symbol and will be saved for output. If it does not match, the remaining filters are searched again, starting again with symbology type.

Serial Cmd:

<

K744,

filter index,symbology type,length,wildcard character,placeholder character,data,decode direction,

check database number

>

Default:

0

(0 = any database)

Options:

0 = Any Index 1 = Database #1...12

13-14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Output Format

Number of Filters

Definition:

The number of filters that symbols will be compared against, up to the specified number. For example, entering 7 means that filters #1 through

#7 will be enabled.

Serial Cmd:

<

K745,number of filters involved

>

Default:

0

Options:

0 to 12

Any number from 1 to 12 enables Output Filtering. A zero (0) disables

Output Filtering. The reader will not perform any filtered output.

For example:

<K745,1>

enables Output Filters #1 setting.

<K745,3>

enables Output Filters #1 to filter #3’s setting.

<K745,0>

disables all output filters. The reader will not perform any filtered output.

Examples to enable and setup filters 1 and 2:

Filter #1

Symbology type = Code 39, Length = disabled, Wildcard = ‘*’, placeholder = ‘?’, data = “AB*” = 41422A

<K744,1,3,0,2A,3F,41422a>

Filter #2

Symbology type = Code 128, Length = 8, Wildcard = ‘*’, placeholder = ‘?’, data = “NBC??FGH” = 4e42433f3f464748.

<K744,2,4,8,2A,3F,4e42433f3f464748>

<K745,2>

enables Ordered Output. It also enables filter index1 and filter index2.

Let’s say we have four symbols, “NBCXYFGH”, “NBDXYFGH”, “123XYZ”, “ABCDE”. The reader will registered two good reads only and transmit the following:“ABCDE”, “NBCX-

YFGH”.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

13-15

Ordered Output

13-16

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

14

Terminal Mode

Chapter Contents

Terminal Window.......................................................................................14-2

Find Function.............................................................................................14-3

Macros.......................................................................................................14-4

Terminal Window Functions ......................................................................14-5

This section describes the terminal window and macro functions.

Note: The characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

Note: You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number, as in

<K100?>

. To see all “

K

” commands, send

<K?>

.

14-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Terminal Window

Terminal Window

To use the terminal mode, click on the

Terminal

button.

You will see the following window:

Clear screen

Copy, paste, and save

Type text here to find in terminal window. Scroll down to recall previous commands.

Type serial command here

Terminal screen

Macro list on this bar

Click on Macro arrow to

Add Macro, Remove

Macro or Edit Macro

Click on Macro to run

Terminal Window

The terminal screen allows you to enter serial commands (in

red

) from the macro box, by copying, or directly from your keyboard.

The terminal screen also displays bar code data or information from the reader (in blue).

You can also right click in the terminal screen to bring up a handy option box.

14-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Terminal Mode

Find Function

The

Find

box allows you to enter text strings to be searched for in the terminal window.

For example a series of bar codes have been scanned into the terminal view and you want to determine if a particular bar code starting with ABC has been read.

1. Type

ABC

into the Find box.

2. Press

Enter

.

The first instance of ABC will be high-lighted in the terminal window.

3. Press the

F3

key to search again for the next instance of ABC.

4. Press

Shift-F3

to search for the previous instance of ABC.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

14-3

Macros

Macros

Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar, edited in a separate window, and executed by clicking on the macro name.

Click on

Next

Row

to see the next row of macros

Click on the first arrow here to see

Add Macro

or

Default Macros

.

When you default macros, the entire macros set is restored to their original macro commands.

Click any other arrow to edit a macro.

When you click on the macro name, the macro is executed in the terminal window.

If this is a command, the command is also sent to the reader at the same time it is displayed.

Editing a Macro

When you click the arrow next to a any macro and select

Edit

, the following appears:

You can edit an existing macro or type in a new macro name and define it in the Macro

Value text box. Click

OK

.

14-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Terminal Mode

Terminal Window Functions

Right-click on the terminal window to display the following:

Copy

selected text to clipboard.

Paste

from terminal or computer text.

Clear

all text in terminal window.

Select All

text in the terminal window.

Save...

brings up a save as dialog box.

Change Font...

of data text, brings up a text dialog.

Change Echo Font...

to change typed in text or commands.

Change Background Color

of terminal window.

Default Settings

changes all the above back to default settings.

Terminal Pulldown Menu

The pulldown Terminal menu has Capture and Save Current Text as well as the functions defined above.

Capture

lets you append data in real time to a text file of your choice.

While in operation, the text file cannot be opened. You can select

Pause

to interrupt the capture flow or

Stop

to end the flow and open the file.

Save Current Text...

saves all text in the terminal window to a text file of your choice.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

14-5

Terminal Window Functions

14-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Chapter

15

Utilities

Chapter Contents

Utilities by ESP .........................................................................................15-2

Read Rate .................................................................................................15-3

Counters....................................................................................................15-4

Device Control...........................................................................................15-6

Master Symbol Database ..........................................................................15-8

Digital Bar Code ......................................................................................15-12

Firmware .................................................................................................15-13

Symbol Type ...........................................................................................15-15

Defaulting/Saving/Resetting ....................................................................15-16

Utility commands are generally commands that are performed during reader operations to check read rates, determine read rates or perform miscellaneous operations on reader hardware. Serial utility commands are not prefaced with a “K” and a numeric code, nor do they require an initialization command (

<A>

and

<Z>

). They can be entered from within any terminal program or from within ESP in the Terminal window.

Note on Serial Commands: To preserve continuity with other Microscan products, some serial configuration commands may include 0s (zeros) or 1s as placeholders. In order for a these commands to be implemented, the placeholder values or commas must be included.

Note: You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number, as in

<K100?>

. To see all “

K

” commands, send

<K?>

.

Note: The characters

NULL

,

<

,

>

, and

,

can only be entered through embedded menus, not through ESP or serial commands.

15-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Utilities by ESP

Utilities by ESP

Click this button to bring up the

Utilities

menu

Note: Utility commands are not accessible by embedded menus.

15-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Utilities

Read Rate

When in a read rate mode, the reader will output a number preceding the symbol data. This number will represent either the number of decoded scans per second or the percentage of successful decoder per total number of scans.

Make a note of the decode rate. It will be a useful reference when calculating the number

of decodes. (See

"Formulas for Number of Decodes"

on page A-20.)

Read Rate by ESP

You can access Read Rate from the Utilities menu. To start or end a read rate test, right-click

Read Rate

and select

Start

or

Stop

.

To change from percent read rate to decodes per second, first end the read rate by selecting

Stop

, then right-click and select

Decodes/Sec

.

Read Rate by Serial Command

Enter Single Symbol Decodes/Second Test

Sending

<C>

instructs the reader to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data

(if any). The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the scan line. This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the scanning device during installation.

Enter Single Symbol Percent Test

Sending

<Cp>

instructs the reader to transmit the percentage of decodes and any scanned symbol data.

Extended Read Rate

Sending

<Ce>

instructs the reader to transmit the decodes per second along with the transitions, scan position, and raster position.

Note: The

<Ce>

command has no immediate effect if not preceded by

<C>

or

<Cs>

.

End Read Rate Test

Sending

<J>

ends both the Percent test and the Decodes/Second test for both single and multi-symbol. Sending a

<J>

will end the read cycle.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

15-3

Counters

Counters

Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65,535. After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65,535, the counter will automatically roll-over and start counting again at 00000 and report any errors. To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the roll-over has occurred, add 65,536 per each roll-over (the reader does not keep track of the number of roll-overs) to the current count.

Note:

All counter values will be lost if power is re-cycled to the reader or the reader receives a reset or save command.

Counters by ESP

You can access Counters from the Utilities menu.

Right-click

the appropriate counter option and select

Request

to display count or

Clear

to set counter to zero. Or, right-click on

Counters

and select

Request All

.

15-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Utilities

Counters by Serial Command

Noread Counter

Sending

<N>

displays the total number of noreads that have occurred since the last reset.

Noread Counter Reset

Sending

<O>

sets Noread Counter to 00000.

Trigger Counter

Sending

<T>

displays the total number of triggers since the last reset.

Trigger Counter Reset

Sending

<U>

sets the trigger counter to 00000.

Good Read/Match Counter

Sending

<V>

displays the total number of good reads matching the master symbol if

Matchcode is enabled. This counter is always enabled, but will only work as a match count when Matchcode is enabled. If Matchcode is not enabled, this counter records the number of good reads. This count can be requested at any time.

Good Read/Match Counter Reset

Sending

<W>

sets the match counter to 00000.

Mismatch Counter

With Matchcode enabled, sending

<X>

displays the number of decoded symbols since the last reset that do not match the master symbol.

Mismatch Counter Reset

Sending

<Y>

sets the mismatch counter to zero.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

15-5

Device Control

Device Control

Outputs

You can access Device Control from the Utilities menu.

Output # 1 Pulse

Definition:

Activates the link between Output 1(+) and Output 1(–) of the host connector for the duration set by

"Pulse Width (Output 1)"

on page

10-17. (regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status).

ESP:

Click

Output # 1 Pulse

to activate.

Serial Cmd:

<L1>

Output # 2 Pulse

Definition:

Activates the link between Output 2(+) and Output 2(–) of the host connector for the duration set by

"Pulse Width (Output 1)"

on page

10-17. (regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status).

ESP:

Click

Output # 2 Pulse

to activate.

Serial Cmd:

<L2>

Output # 3 Pulse

Definition:

Activates the link between Output 3(+) and Output 3(–) of the host connector for the duration set by

"Pulse Width (Output 1)"

on page

10-17. (regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status).

ESP:

Click

Output # 3 Pulse

to activate.

Serial Cmd:

<L3>

15-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Utilities

Extras

Disable Reader

Usage:

This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being scanned or the reader is being configured.

Definition:

ESP:

Sending

Click

<I>

will turn the laser off and end the current read cycle.

Disable Reader

button.

Serial Cmd:

<I>

Disabling laser scanning will not affect any downloaded commands to the reader.

Enable Reader

Definition:

ESP:

Causes the laser reader to be on continuously.

Click

Enable Reader

button.

Serial Cmd:

<H>

Note:

Enable/Disable Reader does not relate to Laser On/Off command.

Send Motor Off

Usage:

This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being scanned or the reader is being configured.

Definition:

ESP:

Turns the spinning mirror off (if not already running).

Click

Send Motor Off

Serial Cmd:

<KF>

or

<K501>

button.

Send Motor On

Usage:

This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being scanned or the reader is being configured.

Definition:

ESP:

Turns the spinning mirror on (if not already running).

Click

Send Motor On

Serial Cmd:

<KE>

or

<K500>

button.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

15-7

Master Symbol Database

Master Symbol Database

Sequential and Wild Card are NOT enabled, and Start Position is equal to 0.

Master Database Overview

Usage:

Definition:

Used where more than one master symbol is required, as in a Multisymbol setup, for matching and other matchcode operations.

Allows you to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database, which can be entered by keyboard, scanned in, displayed, or deleted by serial or ESP commands.

Set master symbol database size here.

Loads the reader’s saved master symbols into ESP.

Loads the next symbol read into selected index.

Double-click a row to enter data into popup dialog box.

Saves the displayed database to the reader.

Maximum Characters for Master Symbol Database

Master Symbol Number Maximum Characters

1 2710

2 1355

7

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

903

667

542

451

387

338

301

271

15-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Utilities

Number of Master Symbols

Definition:

Number Of Master Symbols allows you to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database.

Serial Cmd:

<

K224,number of master symbols

>

Note: To request the number of master symbols Send

<K224,?>

Default:

Options:

1

1 to 10

To Set the Number of Master Symbols in ESP

1. Click the

Utilities

button and click the

Master Database

tab.

2. Click the

Matchcode Type

checkbox to enable

Matchcode

.

3. Set the number of master symbols you want to include.

Scroll

up or down to set the number of master symbols.

To Request the Number of Master Symbols in ESP

1. Click the

Utilities

button and the

Master Database

tab.

2. Click on the

Receive Reader’s Database

button.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

15-9

Master Symbol Database

Enter Master Symbol Data

Definition:

Serial Cmd:

<

K231,master symbol number,master symbol data

>

Default:

1, (blank)

Options:

Allows you to enter master symbol data for a specific master symbol index number (1 to 10), provided the index number is not larger than the number of symbols enabled by the Number Of Master Symbols (see page

15-9

). For example, if Number Of Master Symbols is set to 2, you will not be able to enter data for symbols 3 through 10.

1 to 10, any combination of ASCII text up to the maximum indicated in

"Maximum Characters for Master Symbol Database"

on page 15-8.

For example, to enter data for master symbol 9, after making certain that

Number Of Master Symbols is enabled for 9 or more symbols, send

<K231,9,data>

.

To enter master symbol data:

1.

Double-click

on each index number you want to setup and copy or type in your data in the popup data entry box.

2. Click on the

Send Database to

Reader

button.

Note: You can also click

Receive

Reader’s Database

to enter the reader’s current database settings.

Caution: Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is

128

, changes to the Number Of Master Symbols will re-allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted (except master symbol #1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation).

The

"Maximum Characters for Master Symbol Database"

table on page 15-8 specifies

the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according to the number of

master symbols defined, from 1 through 10. See

"Number of Master Symbols"

on page

15-9.

15-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Utilities

Request Master Symbol Data

Definition:

Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to

10.

For example, to request master symbol #5, enter

<K231?,5>

. The reader transmits the following format:

<K231,5,data>

. If no master symbol data available, the output will be:

<M5/?>

.

Serial Cmd:

Send <

K231?,master symbol number

,master symbol data> to request the current master symbol for a specific master symbol.

Returns all master symbols if no number is added before the question mark.

Options:

1 to 10

Request All Master Symbols Data

Definition:

Returns master symbol data for all enabled master symbols from 1 to 10.

Serial Cmd:

Send

<K231?>

to request all current master symbols.

Delete Master Symbol Data

Definition:

Delete Master Symbol Data allows you to delete an enabled master symbol.

Serial Cmd:

Send <

K231,master symbol number,

> to delete the master symbol.

Options:

1 to 10

Store Next Symbol as Master Symbol

Definition:

After you’ve set the size in the database, you can order the reader to scan-in the next symbol as master symbol 1.

Serial Cmd:

<

Gmaster symbol number

>

To store the next symbol scanned as master symbol #1 send:

<G>

or

<G1>

. For all symbols numbers except 1, the number must be included.

Options:

1 to 10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

15-11

Digital Bar Code

Digital Bar Code

When you click the

Digital Bar Code

tab and the

Start

button, a digitized representation of the symbol in front of the reader will appear.

This routine is useful for conveying a sense of the symbol’s readability and graphically indicating bad or unreadable portions of symbols, extraneous “noise,” etc. A green waveform indicates a decoded symbol; a red waveform indicates an undecoded symbol or other object.

The read triangles represent the width of the scan beam relative to the symbol. The upward pointing arrows indicated the symbol’s margin.

Zoom In, Zoom Out

You can zoom in by sliding the

Zoom

lever to the right. You may have to scroll right or left to locate your symbol, but the results will be striking.

15-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Utilities

Firmware

Firmware Update

Firmware Update is used to download application code to the reader.

Application code versions are specific to your reader. Consult with your sales representative before downloading application code. If needed, an application code will be sent to you in the form of a

*.mot

file.

To download application code:

1. First make sure the host is connected to your reader.

2. Apply power to the reader.

3. In the

Firmware Update

pulldown window, select

App Code

.

This will open a file dialog box.

4. Navigate to the appropriate file (a

*.mot

file) and open the file.

5. Allow a minute or so for the firmware to download.

As application code begins to download to the reader, the reader will go silent, the reader’s RDY and GD/RD LEDs will flash intermittently, and a progress indicator at the bottom of the ESP window will let you know when the download is complete.

Caution

: Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

15-13

Firmware

Firmware Verification

Request Part Number

From the Firmware tab in the Utilities menu, select

App Code

or B

oot Code

from the pulldown selection box and click

Request Part No

.

Request Checksum

From the Firmware tab in the Utilities menu, select

App Code

or

Boot Code

from the pulldown selection box and click

Request Checksum No

.

Firmware/Checksum Verification

From Firmware Verification you can request the part number and checksum from by selecting

App Code

or

Boot Code

and clicking the accompanying

Request...

button.

15-14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Utilities

Symbol Type

Sending

<P>

enables the reader to decode all available symbol types except Pharmacode and PDF417 without changing reader configuration.

Sending

<Q>

enables the reader to decode Code 39 symbols without changing reader configuration.

Sending

<R>

enables the reader to decode Codabar symbols without changing reader configuration.

Sending

<S>

enables the reader to decode I-2/5 symbols without changing reader configuration.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

15-15

Defaulting/Saving/Resetting

Defaulting/Saving/Resetting

Understanding and controlling your reader’s active, saved, and default settings is critical to the operation of your reader.

Software Reset/Save/Recall Commands

<A>

Reset (does not save for power-on)

<Ard>

Reset and recall factory defaults

<Arp>

Reset and recall power-on parameters

<Arc>

Reset and recall customer default parameters

<Z>

<Zc>

Save current settings for power-on

Save current settings as customer default parameters

<Zrd>

Recall factory defaults and save for power-on

<Zrc>

Recall customer default and save for power-on

<Zp>

Reset and save factory settings

Important: The following commands need to be followed by a

<Z>

to be saved for power-on:

Host Protocol, Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity, Trigger Characters

(Delimited, Start, and Stop) Preamble, Postamble, and Noread Message.

All other parameters are saved for power-on without a

<Z>

. However, a

<Zrd>

affects all parameters.

See

"Defaulting/Saving/Resetting"

on page A-16 for a complete explanation of

resets, saves and defaulting.

15-16

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Chapter Contents

Appendix A General Specifications ............................................................ A-2

Appendix B Electrical Specifications .......................................................... A-4

Appendix C Serial Configuration Commands............................................. A-8

Appendix D Serial Command Format....................................................... A-12

Appendix E ASCII Table........................................................................... A-14

Appendix F Defaulting/Saving/Resetting.................................................. A-16

Appendix G Symbol Configuration ........................................................... A-18

Appendix H Formulas for Number of Decodes......................................... A-20

Appendix I Operational Tips ..................................................................... A-23

Appendix J Embedded Menus ................................................................. A-24

Appendix K Interface Standards............................................................... A-25

Appendix L Multidrop Communications.................................................... A-26

Appendix M Glossary of Terms ................................................................ A-31

A-1

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

General Specifications

Appendix A — General Specifications

Mechanical

3.07 (78)

FRONT

Weight: 16 oz. (453g)

Environmental

Enclosure rating: IP65

Operating temperature: 0° to 50°C

(32° to 122°F)

Storage temperature: –50° to 75°

(–63° to 167°F)

Humidity: Up to 90% (non-condensing)

2X M4

6mm min. depth

.56 (14)

1.98

(50)

Emissions

EN 55022:1998 + A1:2000 + A2:2003 Limits

& Methods: ITE Disturbances (radiated and conducted)

EN55024:1998 (General Immunity:

Residential)

EN61000-6-2:2001 (Heavy Industrial:

Immunity)

Laser Light

Type:

Semiconductor visible laser diode

(650nM nominal)

Operating Life: 50,000 hours @ 25°C

Safety class: CDRH Class II

BOTTOM

1.76

(45)

.58 (15)

1.28

(32)

BACK

3.74 (95)

3.06 (78)

Scanning Parameters

Scanning mirror type: Rotating, 10-faceted

Options: Single line, fixed raster

Scan speed: Adjustable from 300 to 1200 scans/second; default = 500 sps

Scan width angle: typically 60°

Pitch: ±50° maximum

Skew: ±40° maximum

Symbol contrast: 25% min. absolute dark to light @ 650nM wavelength

1.036

(26)

3X M4

7mm min. depth

2.44

(62)

4.28

(109)

Safety Certifications

FCC, CDRH, CE, UL/cUL, BSMI pending

.56 (14)

Communications

RS-232, RS-422/485, Daisy chain, and auxiliary port capable

Symbologies

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader

Standard: Code 39, Code 128/EAN-128, I-2/5, Codabar, Code 93, UPC/EAN, Pharmacode, and PDF417, Industrial 2/5, RSS 14, RSS Expanded, RSS Limited, PDF417, Composite.l

A-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Read Ranges

Read Ranges with FIS Options

Narrow-bar-width Range

FIS-0860-0003 - High Density (@ >350 dps)

5 mil (.127 mm)

7.5 mil (.191 mm)

1.5" to 2.75" (38 to 70 mm)

1" to 4" (25 to 102 mm)

FIS-0860-0002 - Medium Density (@ >350 dps)

7.5 mil (.191 mm) 1.5" to 5.25" (38 to 113 mm)

10 mil (.254 mm)

15 mil (.381 mm)

.75" to 7.25" (19 to 184 mm)

.5" to 9.25" (13 to 235 mm)

30 mil (.762 mm) 1" to 13" (25 to 330 mm)

FIS-0860-0001 - Low Density (@ >350 dps)

10 mil (.254 mm)

15 mil (.381 mm)

20 mil (.508 mm)

30 mil (.762 mm)

40 mil (1.02 mm)

6.5” to 13.25” (165 to 336 mm)

4" to 18" (102 to 457 mm)

2.5" to 20" (64 to 508 mm)

2" to 24" (50 to 610 mm)

2" to 28" (50 to 711 mm)

Narrow-bar-width Range

FIS-0860-0007 - Extended Range, Near Focus (@ >350 dps)

10 mil (.254 mm) 3” to 11” (77 to 279 mm)

15 mil (.381 mm) 2” to 16” (51 to 406 mm)

FIS-0860-0008 - Extended Range, Middle Focus (@ >350 dps)

10 mil (.254 mm)

15 mil (.381 mm)

14” to 17” (356 - 431 mm)

11” to 21” (280 - 533 mm)

FIS-0860-0004 - Extended Range, Far Focus (@ >350 dps)

20 mil (.508 mm) 25” to 41” (635 - 1041 mm)

30 mil (.762 mm)

40 mil (1.02 mm)

21” to 42” (534 - 1066 mm)

19” to 47” (483 to 1193 mm)

8

Scanner Read Range/Width

6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8

203

Medium Density

152 101 50 50 101 152 203

.030"

.762 mm

.015"

.381 mm

.010"

.254 mm

.0075"

.190 mm in.

mm

355

304

254

203

High Density

.0075"

.190 mm

.005"

.127 mm

152

101

50

Scale

0

0

2

50 in.

mm

MS-860

Typical scan cone >90% mm in.

Range

14

12

4

2

8

10

6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Scanner Read Range/Width

16 12 8 4

406 304 203 101

0

Low Density

4 8 12 16 in.

101 203 304 406

Extended Range

mm

1016

.015"

.381 mm

.020"

.508 mm

914

812

711

609

.040"

1.02 mm

.030"

.762 mm

.020"

.508 mm

.015"

.381 mm

508

406

304

203

101

Scale

0

0

4

101 in.

mm

MS-860

Typical scan cone >90% mm in.

Range

40

36

32

28

24

8

4

20

16

12

A-3

Electrical Specifications

Appendix B — Electrical Specifications

Maximum Operating Power: 5W max.

Power Input: 10 to 28VDC, 200mV p-p max. ripple, 110 mA @ 24VDC (typical)

Outputs (1,2,3): 1 to 28VDC rated (optoisolated) (I

CE

<100mA @24VDC, current limited by user)

Trigger, Input 1, New Master: 5 to 28 VDC rated (optoisolated)

MS-860 Host Connector (25-pin D-subminiature)

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

25

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

Pin

1

4

5

2

3

Host RS232

RTS

CTS

Host & Aux RS232

Chassis ground

Host RS422/485

TxD

RxD

Aux TxD

Aux RxD

Output 1 (+)

Signal ground

Output 2 (+)

Trigger (–)

Trigger (+)

Default configuration ( activated by connecting pin 11 to pin 7)

Input 1 (+)

RxD (+)

TxD (–)

Noread/Output 3 (+)

RxD (–)

Power ground

Power +10 to 28 VDC

TxD (+)

Output 1 (–)

Output 2 (–)

Noread/Output 3 (–)

Input 1 (–)

New master (–)

New master (+)

In/Out

Out

Out

In

In

In

Out

Out

Out

Out

In

In

In

In

In

Out

In

In

In

Out

In

Out

In

Out

Connectors on the back of the MS-860:

(1) Power connector

(2) Host 25-pin connector

(3) Trigger connector

1

2

3

MS-860 Power Connector

(3-pin MicroChange)

Power ground

NC

Power + 10 to 28 VDC

MS-860 Trigger Connector

(4-pin MicroChange)

In

1

2

3

4

Power + 10 to 28 VDC

Trigger –

Power ground

Trigger + a

Out a. Power ground: Used for power return only.

Caution:

1. Be sure all cables are connected

BEFORE applying power.

2. Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables.

2

3

1

1

25

3

2

1

2

Reader Connectors

3

4

1

A-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Optoisolator Outputs

Optoisolator circuits can transfer pulses between the reader and peripherals with no direct connection with the reader’s internal circuitry. However, not every optoisolator configuration provides complete isolation. The following diagrams show both fully optoisolated and non-optoisolated circuits. They are only examples and do not represent all the possible wiring configurations.

V

Out-On a t

On-Typ t

Off-Typ

I load

=5mA I

0.7 V

30µS

1000µS

load

=50mA I

0.9V

20µS

150µS

load

a. Voltage drop across output when activated.

=100mA

1.0V

30µS

75µS

Scanner

Output

Outputs (+)

I

Load

Outputs (–)

Output Circuit Examples

Fully Optoisolated

This circuit is fully optoisolated and is the recommended configuration. It allows the user to apply 1 to 28 VDC to the circuit.

Caution: The maximum current that can pass through the optoisolator is

100mA.

Isolated Reader

Power (+)

Scanner

Output

Outputs (+)

Outputs (–)

Power ground

Host

1 to 28 V

Input

Not Optoisolated, Reader Grounded

In this diagram, power is applied externally, but the reader’s power ground is used to complete the circuit. This setup involves some risk to the optoisolator if excessive voltages are applied.

Caution: The maximum current that can pass through the optoisolator is

100mA.

Non-isolated Reader

Power (+)

Scanner

Output

Outputs (+)

Outputs (–)

Power ground

Host

1 to 28 V

Input

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-5

Electrical Specifications

Additional Isolated Output Circuit Examples

Secondary Relay

1 to 28 V

RELAY

Isolated Reader

Power +

Isolated Reader

Power +

Scanner

Output

Outputs (+)

Scanner

Output

Outputs (+)

Outputs (–)

Power ground

Outputs (–)

Power ground

PLC

V

PLC

Input

PLC

GND

A-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Optoisolator Inputs

All discrete inputs can be fully isolated pulses as PNP or NPN circuits.

Inputs include trigger, new master, and input 1.

V

IN-HIGH

/I

IN-HIGH

V

IN-LOW

/I

IN-LOW

Pulse Width min

Minimum

10V/4mA

0 V/0mA

48 µS

Maximum

28V/33mA

2V/2mA

Note: Trigger pulses can be sent to the reader either through the host 25-pin connector or a separate 4-pin trigger connector.

25-Pin Connector Input Examples

Fully Optoisolated

Isolated Reader

V

CC

PNP Source

+V

Signal

Isolated Reader

V

CC

Input (+)

NPN Source

+V

Input (+)

Input (–)

Input (–)

Signal

Not Optoisolated

Non-isolated Reader

V

CC

Power (+)

PNP Source

+V

Input (+)

Signal

Non-isolated Reader

V

CC

Power (+)

Input (+)

NPN Source

+V

Input (–)

Input (–)

Signal

Power ground

Power ground

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-7

Serial Configuration Commands

Appendix C — Serial Configuration Commands

The following table is a list of all the available serial configuration commands (also called “K commands”). These commands are also listed at the beginning of each applicable chapter.

Complete List of Serial Configuration Commands

Command Title

EZ Button Modes

Format

EZ Button

<

K771,

position 1 mode[0...9],position 2 mode[0...9],position 3

mode[0...9]>

<

K770,

global status,default on power-on> EZ Button Options

EZ Button Auto Framing

Calibration Options

<

K773,

raster status,laser status>

Calibration Options

<

K521,

raster options,video status,scan speed status,laser power status,laser framing status,symbology detect>

Host Port Connections

Host Protocol

Auxiliary Port

Daisy Chain Auto Configure

<

K100,

Communications

baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>

<

K140,

protocol>

<

K101,

aux port mode,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits,daisy chain

status,daisy chain ID>

<

K150DAISY

>

Daisy Chain Scanner ID <

K151,

daisy chain scanner,daisy chain scanner ID>

Auxiliary Port System Status <

K146,

aux status>

Preamble

Postamble

<

K141,

status,preamble>

<

K142,

status,postamble>

LRC <

K145,

status>

Response Timeout <

K143,

timeout>

Multisymbol

Trigger Mode

External Trigger State

Read Cycle

<

K222,

number of symbols,multisymbol separator>

<

K200,

trigger mode,trigger filter duration>

<

K202,

external trigger state>

Serial Trigger Character <

K201,

serial trigger character>

Start Serial Trigger Character <

K229,

start trigger character>

Stop Serial Trigger Character <

K230,

stop trigger character>

End of Read Cycle <

K220,

end of read cycle mode,read cycle timeout>

Decodes Before Output <

K221,

number before output,decodes before output mode>

Configuration Database Control

Database Setup

<

K253,

index,gain,AGC mode,tracking,raster top,raster bottom,raster speed,laser framing status,laser on position,laser off position,laser

power,background color>

<

K252,

number of active indexes,database cycles> Database Operation

Database Mode

Save Current to Database

<

<

K254,

mode,count/time>

K253+,

database index>

Load Current from Database <

K253-,

database index>

A-8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Tracking

Scan Speed

Automatic Gain Control

Symbol Detect Status

Maximum Element

Raster Setup

Laser Setup

Code 39

Code 128/EAN-128

Interleaved 2 of 5

Codabar

UPC/EAN

Code 93

RSS Expanded

RSS Limited

RSS-14

Pharmacode

Symbol Data Output

Noread Message

Bad Symbol Message

No Symbol Message

Output Indicators

Beeper

Serial Verification

Complete List of Serial Configuration Commands

PDF417

Micro PDF417

Composite

Narrow Margins/Symbology

ID

Background Color

Reader Setup

<

K520,

tracking>

<

K500,

scan speed>

<

K504,

gain level,AGC sampling,AGC min,AGC max>

<

K505,

symbol detect status,transition counter>

<

K502,

maximum element>

Raster/Laser

<

K506,

raster status,top offset,bottom offset,raster sweep rate,read cycle on/off>

<

K700,

laser on/off status,laser framing status,laser on position,laser off

position,laser power>

Symbologies

<

K470,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,default symbol length,full ASCII set>

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN-128 status,output format,application record separator status,application

record separator character,application record brackets,application record

padding>

<

K472,

status,check digit status,check digit output status,symbol length

#1,symbol length #2,guard bar status,range mode>

<

K471,

status,start & stop match status,start & stop output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check digit type,check digit output status>

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,separator character,supplementals type,UPC-E output as UPC-A>

<

K475,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

<

K484,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

<

K483,

status>

<

K482,

status>

<

K477,

status,fixed bar length status,fixed bar length,min. no. of bars,bar widths,direction,fixed threshold value>

<

K476,

status,[unused],fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,decode at end of read>

<

K485,

status,[unused],fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

<

K453,

mode,separator status,separator>

<

K450,

narrow margins status

, symbology identifier>

<

K451,

background color>

I-O Parameters

<

K705,

symbol data output mode,when to output>

<

K714,

status,noread message>

<

K715,

bad symbol status,bad symbol message>

<

K716,

no symbol status,no symbol message>

<

K750,

green flash mode,[unused],green flash duration>

<

K702,

beeper output>

<

K701,

serial command echo status,serial command beep status,con-

trol/hex output>

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-9

Serial Configuration Commands

Complete List of Serial Configuration Commands

Input 1

Output 1

Trend Analysis (1)

Diagnostics (1)

Output 2

Warning Messages

Laser High/Laser Low

High Temperature

Low Temperature

<

K730,

input mode,active state>

<

K810,

output on,active state,pulse width,output mode>

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output

on,decodes/trigger threshold>

<

K790,

over temperature,service threshold,[unused],laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

<

K811,

output on,output state,pulse width,output mode>

Trend Analysis (2)

Diagnostics (2)

Output 3

Trend Analysis (3)

Diagnostics (3)

Quality Output

<

K781,

trend analysis mode,number of triggers,number to output

on,decodes/trigger threshold>

<

K791,

over temperature,service threshold,unused,laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

<

K812,

output on,output state,pulse width,output mode>

<

K782,

trend analysis mode,number of triggers,number to output

on,decodes/trigger threshold>

<

K792,

over temperature,service threshold,unused,laser current

high,laser current low,low temp>

<

K704,

quality output separator,decodes/trigger status,decode direction

status>

<

K759,

status,separator>

Database Number Output

Symbol Position Output

Read Duration Output

Matchcode Type

<

K758,

raster status,scan status,separator>

<

K706,

status,separator>

Matchcode

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,match length,wild card character,sequence on noread,sequence on

mismatch>

<

K228,

sequence step>

<

K225,

status>

Sequence Step

New Master Pin

Master Symbol

Database Size

<

K224,

number of master symbols>

Match Replace

Mismatch Replace

Power-on/Resets Counts

Hours Since Reset

<

K735,

status,message>

<

K735,

status,message>

Master Symbol Database

Enter/Delete Master Symbol

Data

<

K231,

master symbol number,master symbol data [no data will delete current master symbol data]>

Request Master Symbol Data <

K231,?

>[for all] or <

K231,

master symbol number

?

>

Diagnostics

< K406,?

> returns: <K406,power-on,resets,power-on saves,custom

default saves> (read only)

< K407?

> returns: <K407,hours,minutes>

<

K400,

warning message status,laser high status,laser low sta-

tus,novram/reset warning status>

<

K411,

laser high status,laser high message,laser low status,laser low message>

<

K402,

high temperature status,high temperature message>

<

K403,

low temperature status,low temperature message>

A-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Service Message

Output Format Status

Extraction Mode

Insertion Mode

Multisymbol Output

Ordered Output

Number of Filters

Complete List of Serial Configuration Commands

<

K409,

status,service message,threshold,resolution>

Output Format

<

K743,

output format status>

<

K740,

output #,start position,length>

<

K741,

output #,length,hex string>

<

K742,

symbol number,status>

<

K744,

filter index,symbology type,length,wildcard character,placeholder

character,data,decode direction,check database number>

<

K745,

number of filters involved>

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-11

Serial Command Format

Appendix D — Serial Command Format

Serial commands are of two types: utility and configuration.

Rules that apply to both utility and configuration commands

• A less than

<

and greater than

>

characters enclose the commands unless non-

delimited commands are used. (See

"Trigger Mode"

on page 7-6.)

• Commands and data are “case sensitive.” That is, characters must be entered as upper or lower case, as specified.

Serial Utility Commands

These are sent during operations and are not followed by

<A>

or

<Z>

.

Serial Configuration “K” Commands

These begin with a single K character followed by a three digit numeric, a comma, data fields separated by commas, and typically, an initializing command, as follows:

<

K

three digit numeric,data,data,...etc.><initializing command>

1

An initializing command of type “

A

” (not saved to non-volatile memory) or type “

Z

(saved to non-volatile memory) may follow the command.

For example, to enable UPC and save the change for power-on, send:

<K473,1><Z>

.

To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power-on, send

<K100,3><A>

.

Serial Configuration Command Conventions:

• All data fields (except the last) must be followed by a comma (without a space).

• The following characters cannot be used:

,

<

,

>

, and

NULL

.

• All fields preceding a modified field must be included.

• If there is no change in preceding fields, then commas alone can be entered in these fields. For example, if only the last field in the following command is changing,

<K100,4,1,0,0>

can be entered as

<K100,,,0>

.

• All fields following a modified field can be omitted. For example, to change Baud

Rate, send

<K100,3>

.

1. In many commands a K command will automatically be saved for power-on with the MS-860.

A-12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Concatenating Configuration Commands

Commands can be concatenated (added together) in a single string or data block.

Serial Command Status Request

To ensure that any command was received and accepted, you can send the Show

Reader Status command:

<?>

.

The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark, for example

<K101?>

. To see all K commands, send a

<K?>

command.

With the MS-860, each K command is framed with a preamble and postamble and may be mixed with bar code symbol data. To prevent this, send an

<I>

command to disable scanning before sending the K request. Follow the K request with an

<H>

command to restore scanning.

Entering Special Characters in Serial Commands

To enter control characters within a serial command, hold down the control key while typing the desired character.

Entering Special Characters in Embedded Menus

Control Characters

Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters, such as:

<CR><LF><NUL><NUL>

.

Press

SP

(the space bar) once, then enter the control character by holding down the control key and simultaneously pressing the desired character. For example to define a line feed, press

SP

, then

Control

and

J

simultaneously. It is displayed as

^J

on the command line and as

<LF>

in the menu when the screen is refreshed.

To Define a Carriage Return as a Character

Press

SP

, then

CR

. It is displayed as

^M

on the command line and as

<CR>

in the menu when the screen is refreshed.

To Define a Space as a Character

Press

SP

twice. It is displayed as a blank space in the menu when the screen is refreshed. While it appears that nothing has been assigned, the hex value 20 will be sent during data transmission.

To Select NUL as the Character

Press

SP

, then a

0

(zero). It is displayed as

<NUL>

in the menu when the screen is refreshed.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-13

ASCII Table

Appendix E — ASCII Table

19

1A

1B

1C

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

0D

0E

0F

10

1D

1E

1F

25

26

27

28

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

29

30

31

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

Dec Hex Mne

00 00 NUL

Ctrl

^@

01 01 SOH ^A

02

03

04

02

03

04

STX

ETX

EOT

^B

^C

^D

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

ENQ

ACK

BEL

BS

HT

LF

VT

FF

^E

^F

^G

^H

^I

^J

^K

^L

CR

SO

SI

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

^U

^V

ETB ^W

CAN ^X

EM

SUB

ESC

FS

^Y

^Z

^[

^\

GS

RS

US

^M

^N

^O

^P

^Q

^R

^S

^T

^]

^^

^_

ASCII Table with Control Characters

57

58

59

60

53

54

55

56

49

50

51

52

45

46

47

48

61

62

63

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

Dec Hex Ch

32 20 SP

33 21 !

34

35

36

22

23

24

#

$

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

*

+

,

%

&

'

(

)

39

3A

3B

3C

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

2D

2E

2F

30

3D

3E

3F

;

<

9

:

7

8

5

6

=

>

?

3

4

1

2

/

0

-

.

89

90

91

92

85

86

87

88

81

82

83

84

77

78

79

80

93

94

95

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

Dec Hex Ch

64 40 @

65 41 A

66

67

68

42

43

44

B

C

D

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

J

K

L

G

H

E

F

I

59

5A

5B

5C

55

56

57

58

51

52

53

54

4D

4E

4F

50

5D

5E

5F

[

\

Y

Z

U

V

W

X

]

^

_

Q

R

S

T

M

N

O

P

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

109 6D

110 6E

111

112

6F

70

113

114

115

116

71

72

73

74

125

126

127

7D

7E

7F

79

7A

7B

7C

75

76

77

78

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

Dec Hex Ch

96 60 `

97 61 a

98

99

100

62

63

64 b c d

65

66

67

68

69

6A

6B

6C j k l g h e f i

{

| y z w x u v

}

~

D s t q r m n o p

A-14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communication Protocol Commands

Protocol Command

(Mnemonic displayed on Microscan menu)

RES

REQ

EOT

STX

ETX

ACK

NAK

XON

XOFF

Control Characters

(Entered in menu or serial command)

^D

^E

^D

^B

^C

^F

^U

^Q

^S

Hex

Cod e

Effect of Command

04 Reset

05 Request

04 Reset

02 Start of Text

03 End of Text

06 Acknowledge

15 Negative Acknowledge

11

Begin Transmission

13

Stop Transmission

Appendices

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-15

Defaulting/Saving/Resetting

Appendix F — Defaulting/Saving/Resetting

Understanding and controlling your reader’s active, saved, and default settings is critical to the operation of your reader.

Software Reset/Save/Recall Commands

<A>

Reset (does not save for power-on)

<Ard>

Reset and recall Microscan defaults

<Arp>

Reset and recall power-on parameters

<Arc>

Reset and recall customer default parameters

<Z>

<Zc>

Save current settings for power-on

Save current settings as customer default parameters

<Zrd>

Recall Microscan default parameters and save for power-on

<Zrc>

Recall customer default parameters and save for power-on

Power-on Parameters

Power-on parameters (saved by the

<Z>

command) are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled or the

<Arp>

command is issued.

Customer Default Parameters

Customer default parameters (saved by

<Zc>

command) are the same set of parameters as power-on but are saved in a different, isolated section of NOVRAM. This can allow a user to essentially create a backup set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power-on parameters have been changed and no longer desired. It is important to note that a hardware default does not affect these parameters. For example, a user that inadvertently changed communication settings in power-on parameters in such a way that they either don't know the settings or don't have the capability to communicate at those settings. By using the hardware default to default the power-on settings to the known Microscan default, the user can then recall their previously customer saved settings with the

<Arc>

or

<Zrc>

commands.

Default on Power-On

You can also use the EZ button to default the reader to customer defaults and save for power-on by holding down the EZ button while applying power to the reader, provided

that this feature is enabled in

"Default on Power-on"

on page 3-7. This is the same as the

<Zrc>

command.

A-16

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Microscan Default Parameters

Microscan defaults parameters are contained in the firmware that cannot be changed.

Software Default

Microscan default parameters can be recalled (loaded into current settings) with

<Ard>

command or recalled and saved for power-on with the

<Zrd>

command.

Hardware Default

If a software default reset is not possible, it may be necessary to reset the reader by shorting (connecting) specific pins. This procedure has the same effect as the

<Zrd>

software command.

Important: For this reset to occur, this command must be executed within 60 seconds after a power-on or a reset.

1. Apply power to the reader.

2. Locate pins 7 and 11 on the host connector.

Caution: Be certain that the correct pins are located. Connecting the wrong pins could cause serious damage to the unit.

3. Momentarily connect these wires (or pins) and listen for a series of short beeps.

4. Within 3 seconds, connect them again. A longer beep should be heard. If not, repeat the process.

Default/Reset Definitions

Defaults are original or saved customer settings that can be recalled, either by software reset

<Zrd>

or hardware reset.

Also when in multidrop, defaulting might be required if the reader has been assigned a polling address and you wish to access the reader’s menu.

Defaulting the reader by

<Zrd>

resets the configuration parameters to Microscan default values. Defaulting might be necessary if you have make temporary changes, communications between the reader and another device are lost or interrupted, or you are using incompatible equipment (for example, a terminal that is set at 38.4K baud communicating with a reader that is set at 115.2K baud).

1

Resets (“

A

” commands) affect only the current settings (active memory) and are not saved for power on or recall.

Active Memory is where the reader’s active settings are stored during use. These are not available on power-on unless saved by a “

Z

” command.

1. There are no menu options or host commands for resetting the configuration program.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-17

Symbol Configuration

Appendix G — Symbol Configuration

You can configure your reader by presenting Code 128 symbols that the MS-860 reader responds to as serial commands.

Note: Your reader does not need to be enabled for Code 128 in order to enter symbol configuration.

Entering Symbol Configuration

The symbol used to enter configuration is the 7-character code 128 symbol shown below. It is not required that the reader be configured to read code 128 symbols to read this start symbol or the following configuration symbols.

To setup for symbol configuration:

1. Put the reader in a read cycle mode.

2. Place a special Code 128 configuration start symbol in the readers field of view.

Use this symbol or one that you have created yourself.

If the reader is able to read the start symbol, it will begin to beep and the performance LEDs will be activated.

3. When the reader starts to beep, remove the configuration symbol from the reader’s field of view.

The beeping will end and the reader will be in the configuration mode.

During the configuration mode the LEDs will emit a side to side “Knight Rider” pattern to let you know you are currently ready to configure.

You can create your own start symbol by encoding the following in Code 128:

FNC4 <_CFG>

.

A-18

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Using Configuration Symbols

Once in symbol configuration mode, serial command data encoded in Code 128 symbols is read by the reader as serial input.

Configuration symbols must meet the following conditions:

1. The only valid configuration symbols are Code 128.

2. Symbol data may contain more than one command, but individual symbols must be presented one at a time. This is because only the first symbol in a read cycle record will be used as a possible configuration symbol.A symbol that is presented to the reader must be read 25 times consecutively to be used as a valid symbol.

Once this is done the reader will interpret the symbol data in the same fashion as it interprets serial data.

3. Any valid command may be entered via symbols including operational commands.

Because the data is treated like serial input multiple symbols may be used to represent one command as long as the symbols are presented individually and in the correct order.

4. Read rate command may also be used to enter read rate from symbol configuration mode.

5. When in read rate, the reader will read the symbologies that were enabled prior to entering the configuration mode. However it will read a “

<J>

” in code 128 regardless of current enable/disable state of code 128.

Once the

<J>

is issued the reader exit both read rate and symbol configuration.

To exit read rate and remain in symbol configuration, you present the start symbol once again. Symbols read in read rate will not configure the reader.

To start a read rate test, scan this symbol:

Exiting Symbol Configuration

There are multiple ways of exiting symbol configuration. The first way is to simply read or serially enter the “

<J>

” command. Other ways include any command that executes a software reset. These commands include the save family as well as the reset family e.g.

<Z>

,

<Zc>

,

<Zrd>

,

<Zrc>

,

<A>

,

<Arc>

and

<Ard>

. When exiting symbol configuration with the symbol “

<J>

,” the reader will beep in response.

To end the read rate test and the symbol configuration program, scan this symbol:

This will terminate symbol configuration mode. Changes made in configuration will remain in effect just as would changes made in the menus or by serial commands.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-19

Formulas for Number of Decodes

Appendix H — Formulas for Number of Decodes

To ensure reliable scanning, apply a minimum of five decodes to each symbol. Use the formulas below to calculate the number of decodes that your symbol will receive.

If the number of decodes you derive from one of these calculations is less than the minimum for your application, plug in the minimum number of decodes (5) and solve for another parameter that might be changed, such as scan speed or scans per second.

Note: While the formulas given here solve for the predicted number of decodes, you may also use the formulas to solve for other parameters that might be changed, such as scan speed, symbol length, etc.

Single Line Ladder Calculation

For single scan line ladder scanning, use the following formula:

SS

= ND (number of decodes)

1

SH (Symbol Height) (ladder formula only) is a measurement of the height of individual bars.

SS (Scan Speed) is the distance per second that a symbol moves through the scan.

DR (Decode Rate) is the number of decodes per second that a given symbol receives (as derived from a stationary scan test).

Single Scan Line Picket Fence Calculation

Direction of label travel

Ladder

Scan Line

For single scan line picket fence scanning use the following formula:

(

SS

)

= number of complete decodes

Direction of label travel

Label placement area

Scan line

Picket Fence

A-20

1. The -3 component in the formula is included to allow for AGC acquisition, an incomplete first scan, and an incomplete last scan. This applies only if the number inside the parentheses equals

4 or more. If the number equals 3, then only subtract 2 to derive 1 good scan.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Raster Picket Fence Calculation

For raster picket fence scanning, the number of decodes (ND) that can be applied to a given symbol can be calculated once the sweep rate (SR) is known.

Sweep Rate (SR)

Sweep rate is the number of raster sweeps (up or down) that occur per second and can be set in ESP.

Since the sweep rate cannot exceed 30 you first need to ensure that your application can achieve this by solving for sweep rate. The sweep rate should generally be set as low as possible in order to maximize the number of scans on a given symbol.

The formula for determining Sweep Rate (SR) is as follows:

1

Direction of symbol travel

Raster pattern

Raster

Picket Fence

SR

=

( )

SR = Sweep Rate, the number of passes, up or down, that are described by the arc of the raster mirror.

SS = Scan Speed, the distance per second that a symbol moves through the scan.

SW = Scan Width, the width across the scan beam, at a given distance from the reader, in which a symbol can be read (picket fence formula only).

SL = Symbol Length, the length of the longest printed symbol to be read plus the length of the quiet zones (picket fence formula only).

Example:

SW = 5

SS = 2 inches per second

SR

=

(

2 2

)

= 1

SL = 1

Important: The maximum sweep rate that your can set the reader to is 80. If your solution is greater than 80, you must change another parameter such as scan speed, etc. and recalculate.

Since SR can only be entered into the software as whole numbers, round off fractions of

SR to the next higher number, for example enter 0.4 as 1 and 3.5 as 4.

In setting up the reader, raster height depends on the raster arc and the symbol distance (range) from the reader. Both the top offset and bottom offsets can be adjusted independently in 255 increments and the resulting arc can vary from 0° to 30°. (See

Chapter 8,

"Raster/Laser"

.)

1. The number 2 in the SR formula ensures that each symbol receives two full raster sweeps.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-21

Formulas for Number of Decodes

Angled Picket Fence Calculation

The number of complete scans for angled picket fence is calculated the same as that for picket fence, with the exception that the scan width is shortened in proportion to scan tilt.

Direction of symbol travel

Scan Line

Angled Picket Fence

Improving the Number of Decodes

After changing any of the parameters described in this section, recalculate the number of decodes.

Scan Speed

Scan speed is a function of motor speed and is adjustable. A slower scan speed may allow greater symbol range and/or higher decode rates, but at the cost of fewer scans per symbol. Applies to both picket fence and ladder oriented symbols. If your application allows it, slowing scan speed (the time in seconds that a symbol is fully within the scan width of the reader) is an effective way to increase the number of decodes.

Range

Adjusting the symbol’s range, if possible, is one of the quickest and most effective ways to improve decode rates. However, in some applications you may need to select a less than optimum range, or one that is beyond the fringes of the ranges.

Scan Width

Increasing scan width will increase the number of scans in a picket fence oriented application. Scan width is linked with scan range and changing one will usually require a change in the other.

Symbol Dimensions, Symbol Density, and Symbol Ratio

Not usually an option in most applications, but changes to symbol parameters can affect number of decodes calculations and possibly decode rates.

If your application allows it, shortening the length of a picket fence symbol means the symbol will be in the scan range longer and hence receive a greater number of scans.

Increasing the height of a ladder symbol means it will receive more scans. Changing symbol density and/or symbol ratio is another way ranges, decode rates, etc. can be altered.

A-22

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Appendix I — Operational Tips

Do:

• Check inputs (scan speed, length, height, etc.) to ensure the desired number of decodes per symbol.

• Connect reader to host before connecting power to the reader; disconnect power before disconnecting the host from the reader.

• For optimum decodes, mount reader so that your symbols pass through the center of the depth-of-field (minimum/maximum range). You find the center by moving your symbol in and out during a read rate test.

• Avoid excessive tilt, pitch, and skew of the symbol.

• Check the symbol for readability by doing a decode rate test. If there is any question about the symbol's readability, contact your Omron representative.

• After changing any parameter that might affect decode rate, repeat decode rate test.

• Clean the reader window with a clean, dry Q-tip or cotton cloth on a regular basis.

Do Not:

• Aim the reader into direct light or sunlight.

• Aim the reader into an external object detector or other light-emitting device.

• Obstruct the reader window with mounting hardware or other objects.

• Connect chassis of reader and host to different ground potentials.

• Operate the reader in excessive temperature environments.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-23

Embedded Menus

Appendix J — Embedded Menus

In addition to ESP, you can also use a communications menu such as Microsoft’s Hyper-

Terminal

to establish communication with Microscan’s embedded menus.

1

Because of size/space limitations of embedded menus, their structures and terms may not precisely match those of ESP or this manual.

1. With your host connected to MS-860, set your host communications settings as follows:

9600

baud,

7

Data Bits,

1

Stop Bits, and

None

Parity.

2. Set Flow Control to

None

.

3. Make the communications port selection. (Usually

COM 1

for Windows.)

Upon connection, send a

<D>

command to bring up the main menu.

Menu navigation commands are case sensitive. Use the space bar or

N

to advance to the next item,

CR

(return key) to select a highlighted item,

B

to return to the previous item,

M

to return to the previous menu, and

ESC

to return to the Main menu or to exit the program. When exiting the program, you will be prompted to save your active settings for power up (

Y

or

N

). Typing Y will be equivalent to saving with a

<Z>

command.

A-24

1. If you are using Microsoft’s HyperTerminal program, you may find that the initial screen is not visible when you call up the program with the

<D>

command. If this occurs, exit the embedded menu with a

ESC

,

E

, and

N

sequence and repeat the

<D>

command.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Appendix K — Interface Standards

Interface Standards, established by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA), specify such things as the signaling voltage levels, maximum cable lengths, and number of drivers. With Microscan devices, selection of interface is made by pin assignment and, in the case of the host communications, by software switching between RS232 and

RS422. Microscan devices use RS232, RS422, and RS485 multidrop.

RS232

RS232 defines an interface between two devices, such as the reader and host. It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line. Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground, a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists; therefore, cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet

(19.7m). Despite being the most limited, this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS232 equipment.

RS422

RS422, unlike RS232, measures signals deferentially; that is, the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive (or transmit) wires rather than the potential between signal and ground. As a result, cables, if shielded, can be up to 4000 feet

(1219m) in length. Like RS232, RS422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground. It can be used wherever RS232 is used.

RS485

RS485, like RS422, can transmit up to 4000 feet (1219 m) using differential voltages, but unlike RS422, its transmitters are turned off until a request for data is received from the host. RS485 is used exclusively in multidrop protocol.

USB

The Universal Serial Bus can connect up to 127 devices to a host at a maximum of 6 megabits per second (Mbps) of bandwidth.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-25

Multidrop Communications

Appendix L — Multidrop Communications

This appendix describes the rules for setting up a concentrator or controller to communicate with a reader in standard Multidrop protocol.

The diagram to the right shows a typical Multidrop network in which 1 to 50 readers can communicate with a host via an intermediary device, a concentrator or a controller.

Host

Concentrator

Polled Protocol

Multidrop ONLY

RS-485 Interface

Reader 01

Reader 02

Reader 03

Configure Your Reader for Multidrop

1. With the reader connected to the host,

Retrieve Reader Settings

.

2. Select

Multidrop

in the Protocol configuration menu.

You will see the following message:

Important:

You must change your preamble and postamble characters so that they are not CR or NULL.

This allows data to move through the concentrator without interference.

3. Click

OK

.

4. Next, go to Preamble Characters (still in the Protocol menu) and double-click on

Characters

.

5. This will open up an ASCII character table. Select any character other than

CR

.

For example, select

LF

.

6. Repeat the above for

Postamble

.

7. Check the multidrop address. Enter a number from

01

to

50

.

8. Right-click in the window and select

Save to Reader

and

Send and Save

.

9. Your reader is now in multidrop. From here on, you will need to use the concentrator to relay commands and data between the reader or readers and the host.

10. Next, go to

"Connect to Reader via the Concentrator"

on the next page.

A-26

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Connect to Reader via the Concentrator

You will need a multidrop concentrator and the required power supplies and cabling to communicate with your reader(s).

1. From the Communications drop down menu, select

Configure Multidrop

to bring up the Multidrop

Settings dialog.

2. If necessary, change the default address to match the address of your multidropped reader and click

OK

.

If the host serial port is not connected in ESP, you will see the following popup message:

ESP is not currently connected to the multidrop concentrator. Do you wish to establish a connection now?

3. Click

Yes

.

You will see a Serial Communication Parameters dialog.

Notice that the Force Connection option is checked. Do not change this.

4. Select the concentrator’s host port communications settings.

When you click

Connect

, you will be connecting to your concentrator, which can then relay commands to the reader whose address was set in the Multidrop Settings dialog.

5. Click

Connect

.

6. You should see the CONNECTED message in green at the bottom of the window along with the reader’s Multidrop address.

7. Click

Retrieve Reader Settings

to upload reader’s configuration. If upload fails, return to the Serial Communication Parameters dialog and make the necessary corrections.

8. Follow the same procedure for connecting other readers to your multidrop network.

Note: For more information, see your reader user’s manual or Microscan’s MS-5000

Multidrop Concentrator User’s Manual, 83-005000.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-27

Multidrop Communications

Polling Sequence

Data that is transmitted to the host (symbol data, noread messages, counters, etc.) via concentrators is solicited by poll requests from the host.

The polling sequence example is by poll address 1E (ASCII hex value for Reader 02) and a REQ (request). The reader responds by first transmitting its own address, 1E, followed by a STX (start of text) character, and then the data. Next it transmits an

ETX (end of text) character and an LRC (longitudinal redundancy check) character.

If the concentrator (or controller) receives the data from the reader and is able to validate it with an LRC calculation, it responds with an ACK (acknowledgment). If the reader in turn receives the ACK, the reader ends this exchange with a RES (reset).

Start of Sequence End of Sequence

Concentrator

Reader 02

RES 1E REQ

1E STX DATA ETX LRC

ACK

RES

Polling Sequence

Polling Reset

• If the reader has no information, it responds to a poll request by transmitting a RES

(reset).

• If the reader receives a NAK instead of the ACK after transmitting its data string, it will re-attempt to send the data string up to three times. If the reader still does not receive an ACK, it will send a RES (reset) and discard the data in its buffers.

• If the reader transmits data to the concentrator and the concentrator responds with an ACK or NAK, but the reader doesn’t receive the concentrator’s response, the reader will timeout and send a REQ to the concentrator and request another response. If after three retries (the number of times it transmits a REQ to the concentrator) the reader receives no response, it ends the transmission with a RES

(reset).

A-28

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Select Sequence

Unlike poll requests, select commands always originate from the host and consist of serial configuration or operation commands to devices that are configured in Multidrop.

The reader complies with the command when it is polled during the cycle.

Start of Sequence

End of Sequence

Concentrator RES 1F REQ

Reader 02 1F ACK

STX <T>ETX LRC

1F ACK

RES

Polling Sequence

A RES (reset) is the first command in the select sequence. The 1F hex is the select address associated with Reader 02 address. It is followed by a REQ (request). The reader responds with its own select address, 1F hex, and an ACK (acknowledge). The concentrator then transmits an STX (start of text), the data (in this case a

<T>

), an

ETX (end of text), and an LRC character.

The reader replies by transmitting its own address, followed by an ACK, acknowledging receipt of the command. Upon receipt of an ACK, the concentrator concludes the successful exchange with a RES.

In the example above, the reader only acknowledges a trigger counter request from the concentrator. It does not respond to the trigger counter request until a subsequent poll.

For example, if the reader’s trigger count was 12 at the time the trigger counter request was received, on a subsequent poll it would send 02T/00012. (The 02 at the beginning of the string is the reader’s address.)

Select Reset

If the reader receives bad data from the concentrator, it transmits a SEL (its select address) and a NAK to the concentrator. The concentrator re-transmits the data up to three times. The concentrator will end the sequence with a RES (reset) if no ACK is received.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-29

Multidrop

Address

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

25

10

11

12

13

06

07

08

09

01

02

03

04

05

Multidrop Communications

Multidrop Addresses

>

@

B

D

:

<

6

8

J

L

F

H

2

4

.

0

*

,

&

(

Poll

Character

Select

Character

ASCII HEX ASCII HEX

^\ 1C ^] 1D

^^ 1E ^1F

SP

"

$

20

22

24

!

#

%

21

23

25

26

28

2A

2C

2E

30

32

34

'

)

+

-

/

1

3

5

2F

31

33

35

27

29

2B

2D

36

38

3A

3C

3E

40

42

44

46

48

4A

4C

7

9

;

=

?

A

C

E

G

I

K

M

3F

41

43

45

37

39

3B

3D

47

49

4B

4D

Multidrop

Address

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

47

48

49

50

35

36

37

38

31

32

33

34

26

27

28

29

30 t v p r l n h j

|

~ x z d f

` b

X

Z

\

^

Poll

Character

Select

Character

ASCII HEX ASCII HEX

N 4E O 4F

P 50 Q 51

R

T

V

52

54

56

S

U

W

53

55

57

58

5A

5C

5E

60

62

64

66

Y

[

]

_ a c e g

61

63

65

67

59

5B

5D

5F

68

6A

6C

6E

70

72

74

76

78

7A

7C

7E i k m o q s u w y

{

}

D

71

73

75

77

69

6B

6D

6F

79

7B

7D

7F

A-30

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Appendix M — Glossary of Terms

Analog Gain Adjustment (AGC). Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the range of the symbol.

Application Record. A variation of UCC/EAN-128 which adds an application identifier to symbol data, including user-definable separators, brackets, and padding.

Autodiscriminate. The ability to decode several different symbologies without changing configuration.

Auxiliary Port. Provides RS-232 connections to an auxiliary terminal or device for remote viewing, for the transfer of data to and from the host, and under certain conditions as a configuration port.

Bar Code. The medium or label on which a symbol is printed or etched.

Bar Code Data. The information that is transmitted from a decoded bar code symbol.

Baud Rate. The number of discrete signal events per second. Bits per second.

Calibration. A routine that cycles through various optical settings and selects the combination that produce the best read rate.

Check Digit. A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 digit that is added to the symbol message for additional data integrity.

Configuration. A setup or process of changing a reader’s settings to conform to a specific application. A physical arrangement of components.

Concentrator. Intermediary device that relays data from readers to a host and commands from the host to the reader or other devices.

Connector. Physical device (plug or socket) on a device or cable to provide in/out connectivity for various circuits and pins.

Counter. Memory space provided to keep track of reader events.

Daisy Chain. Linkage of master and secondary readers to allow data to be relayed up to the host via auxiliary port connections.

Decode. A good read. The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in symbol.

Default. (verb) Restore Microscan or customer default settings, initialize serial commands and reset all counters.

Defaults. (noun) The settings that are restored whenever a default takes place.

Delimited. A command or field that is bracketed by pre-defined characters.

Decode Rate (DR) The number of decodes per second that a given reader is capable of receiving.

Depth of Field. The distance between the minimum and maximum range in which symbols have been read.

Discrete I/O. Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur.

Dynamic Setup. Testing and configuration done with symbols in motion.

EPROM. Erasable, programmable, read only memory.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-31

Glossary of Terms

Embedded Memory. Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash.

End of Read Cycle. The time or condition at which the reader stops expecting symbol information to decode.

Edge. Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object (rising edge). The read cycle ends with a good read, a timeout, or a new trigger.

ESP. Easy Setup Program.

Falling Edge. A change of state (to inactive) associated with a level trigger in which the reader stops searching for symbols. (See Rising Edge.)

Fixed Code Length. Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

Flash Memory. Memory that can be changed by downloading new code and recalled on power-on.

Focal Length. The distance measured from the reader to the center of the depth of field, or

focal

point.

Focus. The point at which the tip of the scan beam is at its narrowest.

Full Duplex. Auxiliary port data is sent directly to the host but not displayed on the auxiliary port screen.

Gain. Optimal signal strength.

Good Match. The event occurring when a scanned symbol matches the master symbol information that is stored in the memory of the device.

Good Read. A decode. The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a symbol.

Half Duplex. Auxiliary port data is sent directly to the host and displayed on the auxiliary port screen.

Host. A computer, PLC, or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals.

Host Port. The pins or connections on a reader or other device that physically connect with a host and—using the RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 standards—pass data and serial commands from one device to another.

Initialize. Implement serial configuration commands into the reader’s active memory.

Input. A channel or communications line. Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a device. See Output.

Intercharacter Delay. The time interval in milliseconds between individual characters transmitted from the reader to the host.

Intercharacter Gap. The extra space between the last element of one character and the first element of the adjacent character of a specific bar code symbol.

Ladder Symbol Orientation. A bar code symbol in which the bars are parallel to the symbol’s direction of travel.

Large Intercharacter Gap. Allows the reader to read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times (3x) the narrow element width.

A-32

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Laser Framing. Setting scan width size by adjusting the on/off duration of the laser beam.

Laser On/Off. When enabled, the laser is ON only during the read cycle, provided the reader is enabled for a Serial or External trigger.

LED. Light emitting diode.

Level. The condition in which a read cycle initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector remains active and ends when the object moves out of the detector’s range.

Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC). An error-checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions.

Master Symbol. A symbol or symbol data that is stored in a reader or reader’s memory and is compared with subsequently read symbols.

Master Reader. First reader in a daisy chain mode and linked directly to the host and in tandem to secondary readers.

Matchcode. The ability to compare symbol data being scanned against a master symbol that is stored in the memory of the reader.

Embedded Menu. Configuration options embedded in the reader’s erasable memory.

ESP Menu. Easy Setup Program. Configuration program that runs in Windows-based operating systems 95 and above.

Mil. One thousandths of an inch or 0.0254 mm. In bar-coding, a measurement standard that identifies a symbol by the width of its narrowest element.

Mismatch. An event that occurs when the scanned symbol does not match the master symbol that is stored in the memory of the reader.

Multisymbol. A reader mode which allows a reader to read more than one symbol in a single read cycle.

Multidrop. A communications protocol for networking two or more readers or other devices with a concentrator (or controller) and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS-485 standard.

Narrow-bar-width. The width of the narrowest bar of a specific bar code symbol, expressed in thousands of an inch (or mils) as defined by standard code types.

Narrow Margins. Allows the reader to read symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times the width of the narrow bar element.

Non-delimited. A command that is not bracketed by pre-defined characters.

Noread. A non-read. A condition that occurs when the reader is set up to decode symbols but no symbol is scanned during the read cycle.

Normally Closed. A discrete output state that is only active when open.

Normally Open. A discrete output state that is only active when closed.

NOVRAM. Non-volatile random access memory. Data that is “saved for power-on” is saved to NOVRAM.

Null. Also spelled “Nul.” A non-printed ASCII character that acts as a space-holder.

Number of Decodes. The number of times a symbol is scanned by the reader during one pass through the laser beam.

Object Detector. A photo electric device used to sense the presence or absence of an object (also referred to as a package detector).

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-33

Glossary of Terms

Output. A channel or communications line. Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device.

Output Format. The modification of data output according to a user-defined index of

Extraction and Insertion commands.

Parity. An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or

0 (zero) so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd.

Picket Fence Symbol Orientation. A bar code symbol in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol’s direction of travel.

Pitch. Symbol (or reader) rotation around the center of a line parallel to the scan beam.

Point-to-Point. A protocol consisting of a single communications event, typically used to connect a bar code reader to a terminal or host computer.

Port. Logical circuit for data entry and exit. (One or more ports may be included within a single connector.)

Protocol. The rules for communication between devices, providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices.

Quiet Zones. Specified “clear” (non printed) areas immediately before and after the bar code symbol. The area is usually white (for black and white symbol) and at least 10 times the width of the narrowest bar, as measured in thousands of an inch. The zones can be other than white as long as their densities remain consistent and they have the required contrast relative to the bars.

RAM. (Random Access Memory) Memory that is lost after power is recycled to the unit.

Raster. Multiple, stacked scans produced by a separate oscillating mirror or by a spinning mirror with varying facet angles.

Read Cycle. A programmed period of time or condition during which the reader will accept symbol input.

Reader. (1) A reader, a bar code device that can read and decode symbols.

(2) A device that reads and decodes 2D matrix codes.

Read Range. The distances in which a symbol can be reliably read, as measured from the front of the reader. See “Depth of Field.”

Reed-Solomon Error Correction Code. A linear, error correcting block code, suited to the correction of character errors which could be, in bar or matrix codes, the obliteration or removal of part of the symbol.

Read Range. The distances in which a symbol can be reliably read, as measured from the front of the reader. See “Depth of Field.”

Relay. An electrical switch that allows a low power to control a higher one.

Reset. Sets all counters to zero.

Rising Edge. A change of state (to active) that initiates (and in some cases ends) a read cycle with a new trigger, an edge trigger, or the leading edge of a level trigger.

(See Falling Edge.)

ROM. (Read Only Memory) Memory that cannot be changed.

Reader. A scanning device that is comprised of a scan head and a decoder integrated in one package.

A-34

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Appendices

Scan Speed. The number of laser scan lines per second that a reader projects from the spinning mirror.

Scan Width (SW) is the width across the scan beam at a given distance from the reader in which a symbol can be read.

Send. Transmit data from one device to another.

Separator. A character that separates data fields.

Serial Commands. Online data strings such as

<D>

or

<P>

sent from a host or auxiliary terminal to a reader or other device.

Serial Configuration (Host Configuration). Serial commands that change configuration; distinguished from operational command by the fact that they can modify non-volatile memory for power-on configuration.

Skew. Symbol (or reader) rotation around the center of the skew axis which is perpendicular to the plane of the scan beam.

Secondary Reader. A reader linked to the master or preceding reader in a daisy chain which relays symbol data to the host. See “Daisy Chain.”

Specular Reflection. The direct, mirror-like reflection of light back to the source causing saturation and bad reads.

Supplemental. A character or data string that is appended to the main bar code symbol.

Symbol. A one or two dimensional decodable pattern that can be recognized and decoded by a bar code reader or 2D reader.

Symbology. A code type, such as Code 39 or Code 128, with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information.

Symbol Density. Symbol size as measured by the narrow bar width.

Symbol Height. (SH) Regardless of orientation, the measurement taken along the length of a symbol’s individual bars.

Symbol Length. (SL) Regardless of orientation, the measurement taken across the symbol's bars from one end to the other, including the quiet zone.

Symbol Transitions. The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol, used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object.

Tilt. Symbol (or reader) rotation around the centerline of the scan beam.

Timeout. The termination of a read cycle or other routine by time.

Timeout Duration. The actual time that elapses during a read cycle or other timed routine.

Tracking. Adjustment of the precision of analog-to-digital conversion.

Transmit. Send or convey signals or information from one device to another.

Transparent. Data that passed between the auxiliary port and the host with keyed data echoed to the auxiliary port

Trigger. A signal, transition, or character string that initiates a read cycle.

Watchdog Timer. A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to reset the reader.

Watchdog Reset. A reset that is forced whenever the software locks up.

Wild Card. User-defined character entered into a master symbol to permit matches with variable characters.

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A-35

Glossary of Terms

A-36

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

A

About the MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader i-viii

Active closed 7-11

Active Memory A-17

Active open 7-11

Active State 10-15

Add Exceptions 2-14

Additional Isolated Output Circuit A-6

Advanced Options 2-14

AGC Maximum Gain 7-20

AGC Minimum Gain 7-20

AGC Mode 7-19

AGC Sampling Mode 7-19

Angled Picket Fence Calculation A-22

App Mode button 1-9, 2-12

Appendices i-vi, A-1

Application Mode 2-3

Application Record

EAN-128 9-8

Application Record Brackets 9-9

Application Record Padding 9-10

Application Record Separator Character 9-9

Application Record Separator Status 9-9

Approvals Pending i-ix

As Is 4-6

As Soon As Possible 10-6

ASCII Table with Control Characters A-14

Auto Frame 3-5

Autoconnect 1-1, 1-5, 2-9

Autodiscriminate 9-1, 9-31

Autodiscrimination 1-8

Automatic Adjustment 8-7

Automatic Gain Control (AGC) 7-19

Aux Port Connections 6-8

Aux Port Mode 6-9

Auxiliary Port System Data 6-1, 6-18

Auxiliary Port System Status 6-18

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Index

1

B

Background Color 9-1, 9-31

Bad Symbol Message 10-1, 10-8

Bad Symbol Status 10-8

Bar Code Options tab 2-8

Bar Width Status 9-25

Barcode Dialog 2-11

Baud Rate

aux port 6-8

Baud Rate, Aux Port 6-8

Baud Rate, Host Port 6-3

Beeper Output Condition 10-11

Bottom Offset 8-4

C

Calibrate 2-2

Calibrate the Reader 1-1, 1-8

Calibrating a Symbol 4-1, 4-4

Calibration i-iii, 3-5, 4-1

Calibration by ESP 4-1, 4-2

Calibration by Serial Command 4-1, 4-2

Calibration Dialog 4-1, 4-5

Calibration Methods 4-3

Calibration Options 4-1, 4-6

Calibration Overview 4-1, 4-3

Caution A-4

Check Digit Output 9-4

Check Digit Output Status 9-11, 9-16

Check Digit Status 9-4, 9-11

Check Digit Type 9-16

Check Index 13-14

Codabar 9-14

Codabar Status 9-14

Code 128 Status 9-7

Code 128/EAN 9-7

Code 39 9-4

Code 39 Status 9-4

Code 93 9-20

Code 93 Status 9-20

Command Conventions A-12

Communication Protocol Commands A-15

Communications i-iv, 6-1, A-2

by Serial Command A-8

2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Communications by ESP 6-1, 6-2

Communications by Serial Command 6-1, 6-2

Composite 9-28

Concatenating Commands A-13

Configuration

by Serial Command 5-2

Configuration by ESP 5-2

Configuration Database i-iii, 4-3, 5-1

Configuration Database Window 5-6

Configure for Multidrop A-26

Configure Multidrop 2-9, A-27

Configure the Reader 1-1, 1-9

Connect 2-9

Connect Menu 2-9

Connect the System 1-1, 1-2

Connect via the Concentrator A-27

Connectors on MS-860 1-2

Continuous 7-19

Continuous Read 7-6

Continuous Read 1 Output 7-7

Control Characters A-13

Control/Hex Output 10-13

Count/Time 5-5

Counter by ESP 15-4

Counters 15-1, 15-4

Counters by Serial Command 15-5

Counts 12-1, 12-4

Customer Default Parameters A-16

Customer Default Saves 12-5

D

Daisy Chain Autoconfigure 6-16

Daisy Chain ID 6-15

Daisy Chain ID Status 6-15

Daisy Chain Mode 6-13

Daisy Chain Reader ID 6-17

Daisy Chain Reader Number 6-17

Daisy Chain Remote Secondary ID 6-17

Data 13-14

Data Bits, Aux Port 6-9

Data Bits, Host Port 6-4

Data initiated from the Auxiliary Port 6-10, 6-11, 6-12

Data initiated from the Host 6-10, 6-11, 6-12

Data initiated from the Reader 6-10, 6-11, 6-12

Database Cycles 5-4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

3

Database Mode 5-5

Database Number Output 10-1, 10-26

Decode at End of Read 9-26

Decode Direction 13-14

Decode Direction Output 10-25

Decode Rate A-20

Decodes Before Output 7-1, 7-16

Decodes Before Output Mode 7-16

Decodes per Trigger 10-20

Decodes/Trigger Status 10-25

Default on Power-On A-16

Default on Power-on 3-7

Default/Reset Definitions A-17

Defaulting 2-14, A-16

Defaulting/Saving/Resetting 15-1, 15-16

Defaults 3-3

Define a Carriage Return as a Character A-13

Define a Space as a Character A-13

Delete Master Symbol Data 15-11

Device Control 15-1, 15-6

Diagnostic Messages Overview 12-1, 12-3

Diagnostic Warning 10-17

Diagnostic Warnings (output 2) 10-23

Diagnostic Warnings (output 3) 10-24

Diagnostics i-v, 12-1

Diagnostics (Output 1) 10-21

Diagnostics by ESP 12-1, 12-2

Diagnostics by Serial Command 12-1, 12-2

Digital Bar Code 15-1, 15-12

Direction 9-25

Disable Reader 15-7

Disabled 3-4, 3-6, 4-8, 7-19, 9-18, 10-4, 10-10, 10-15, 10-17

Disclaimer i-ii

Document Memo 2-8

E

EAN Status 9-17

EAN-128 Status 9-8

Easy Mode 2-2, 2-12

Editing a Macro 14-4

Electrical Specifications A-4

Embedded Menus A-24

Emissions A-2

Enable Reader 15-7

Enabled 3-6, 4-8, 9-18, 9-28

4

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

End of Read Cycle 7-1, 7-14, 10-6

End of Read Cycle Mode 7-14

End Read Rate Test 15-3

Enter Master Symbol Data 15-10

Enter Single Symbol Decodes/Second Test 15-3

Enter Single Symbol Percent Test 15-3

Entering Special Characters in Embedded Menus A-13

Entering Special Characters in Serial Commands A-13

Entering Symbol Configuration A-18

Environmental A-2

Exceptions 2-14

Exiting Symbol Configuration A-19

Extended Read Rate 15-3

External Edge 7-9

External Level 7-8

External Trigger State 7-11

Extraction by ESP 13-4

Extraction by Serial Command 13-5

Extraction Mode 13-1, 13-4

Extras 15-7

EZ Button i-iii, 3-1, 10-1, 10-14

EZ Button Auto Framing 3-7

EZ Button by ESP 3-1, 3-2

EZ Button by Serial Command 3-1, 3-2

EZ Button Modes 3-1, 3-4

EZ Button Operation 3-1, 3-3

EZ Button Options 3-1, 3-6

F

Factory Default Parameters A-17

File 2-4

Filter #1 13-15

Filter #2 13-15

Filter Index 13-12

Filters 1 and 2 13-15

Find Function 14-1, 14-3

Firmware 15-1, 15-13

Firmware Update 15-13

Firmware Verification 15-14

Firmware/Checksum Verification 15-14

FIS Options A-3

Fixed Symbol Length 9-21, 9-26, 9-27

Fixed Symbol Length Status 9-5, 9-7, 9-15, 9-20, 9-21, 9-24, 9-26, 9-27

Fixed Threshold Value 9-25

Formulas for Number of Decodes A-20

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

5

Frame 4-6

Full ASCII Set 9-6

Full Duplex Mode 6-12

Fully Optoisolated A-5, A-7

G

Gain A-22

Gain Level 7-17

General Specifications A-2

General tab 2-6

Global Status of EZ Button 3-6

Glossary of Terms A-31

Good Read 10-5

Good Read (Green Flash) 10-10

Good Read/Match Counter 15-5

Good Read/Match Counter Reset 15-5

Grading 15-16

Green Flash Duration 10-11

Green Flash Mode 10-10

Guard Bar 9-13

I

H

Half Duplex Mode 6-11

Hardware Default A-17

Hardware Required 1-2

Hex String 13-7

High Temperature 12-1, 12-9

High Temperature Message 12-9

High Temperature Status 12-9

Highlighting i-viii

Host Communications i-viii

Host Connector, 25-pin, MS-850 A-4

Host Port Connections 6-3

Host Protocol 6-4

Hours Since Last Reset 12-1, 12-6

I 2/5 symbol 1-6

I/O Parameters i-iv, 10-1

I/O Parameters by ESP 10-1, 10-2

6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

I/O Parameters by Serial Command 10-1, 10-3

Import/Export 2-4

Improving the Number of Decodes A-22

In Read Cycle 10-17

Index i-vi

Input 10-1, 10-15

Insertion by ESP 13-6

Insertion by Serial Command 13-7

Insertion Mode 13-1, 13-6

Install ESP 1-1, 1-3

Interface Standards A-25

Interleaved 2 of 5 9-11

Interleaved 2 of 5 Status 9-11

K

K Commands A-12

L

Label Configuration 3-5

Label Speed A-22

Ladder A-20

Large Intercharacter Gap 9-5, 9-15

Laser Current High 10-21

Laser Current Low 10-22

Laser Framing 8-7

Laser Framing Status 4-8

Laser High 12-1, 12-7

Laser High Message 12-7

Laser High Status 12-7

Laser Light A-2

Laser Low 12-1, 12-8

Laser Low Message 12-8

Laser Low Status 12-8

Laser Off Position 8-8

Laser On Position 8-8

Laser On/Off 8-6

Laser Power 7-18, 8-8

Laser Power Status 4-8

Laser Setup 7-1, 7-22, 8-1, 8-6

Laser Status 3-7

Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch on Input #1) 10-18

Latch Mode 2 (Unlatch Opposite Condition) 10-18

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

7

Latch Mode 3 (Unlatch Enter Read Cycle) 10-18

Latest Manual Version i-ii

Leading Edge 7-19

Length 13-5, 13-7

Limitation of Liability i-vii

List of Serial Commands A-8

Load Current Settings from Database 5-7

Load New Master 3-5

Longitudinal Redundancy Check 6-21

Low Temperature 10-22, 12-1, 12-9

Low Temperature Message 12-9

Low Temperature Status 12-9

LRC Status 6-1, 6-21

M

Macros 14-1, 14-4

Manual Adjustment 8-7

Master Database Overview 15-8

Master Reader 6-16

Master Symbol Database 15-1, 15-8

Match 10-4, 10-16

Match (Green Flash) 10-11

Match Length 11-1, 11-7

Match Replace 11-1, 11-12

Match Replacement Message 11-12

Match Start Position 11-1, 11-6

Matchcode i-v, 11-1

Matchcode by ESP 11-1, 11-2

Matchcode by Serial Command 11-1, 11-2

Matchcode Type 11-1

Maximum Element 7-21

Mechanical A-2

Micro PDF417 9-27

Microscan Grading 15-16

Minimum Bars 9-25

Mismatch 10-4, 10-16, 10-19

Mismatch (Green Flash) 10-11

Mismatch Counter 15-5

Mismatch Counter Reset 15-5

Mismatch or Noread 10-16

Mismatch Replace 11-1, 11-13

Mismatch Replacement Message 11-13

Model 2-5

Model Memo 2-8

Model Selection 1-4

8

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Modifiers for Code 39, Codabar, and I–2/5 9-30

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual i-i

Multidrop 6-6

Multidrop Address Table A-30

Multidrop Communications A-26

Multisymbol 7-1, 7-4

Multisymbol Number 13-8

Multisymbol Output Format Status 13-1, 13-8

Multisymbol Separator 7-5

N

Narrow Margins 9-1, 9-29

Navigating in ESP 2-12

New 2-4

New Master Pin 11-1, 11-11

New Trigger 7-15

No Symbol Message 10-1, 10-9

No Symbol Status 10-9

Noise Interference A-25

Non-delimited Start and Stop Characters 7-13

Noread 10-16, 10-19

Noread Counter 15-5

Noread Counter Reset 15-5

Noread Message 10-1, 10-7

Noread Status 10-7

Normally Closed 10-17

Normally Open 10-17

Not Optoisolated A-7

Not Optoisolated, Reader Grounded A-5

Number Before Output 7-16

Number of Active Indexes 5-4

Number of Filters 13-15

Number of Master Symbols 15-9

Number of Symbols 7-4

Number to Output On 10-20

O

Object detector 1-2

Open/Save 2-4

Operation of Database 5-4

Operational Tips A-23

Options 2-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

9

Optoisolator Inputs A-7

Optoisolator Outputs A-5

Ordered Output 13-1, 13-10

Ordered Output by ESP 13-11

Ordered Output by Serial Command 13-12

Other Codes 9-30

Output # 13-5, 13-7

Output # 1 Pulse 15-6

Output # 2 Pulse 15-6

Output # 3 Pulse 15-6

Output 1 10-1, 10-16

Output 2 10-1, 10-23

Output 3 10-1, 10-24

Output Circuit Examples A-5

Output Format i-v, 9-8, 13-1

Output Format by ESP 13-1, 13-2

Output Format by Serial Command 13-1, 13-2

Output Format Examples by Serial Command 13-7

Output Format Insertion 13-6

Output Format Overview 13-1, 13-3

Output Format Status 13-3, 13-8

Output Format Status by ESP 13-9

Output Indicators 10-1, 10-10

Output Mode (Output 1) 10-18

Output On 10-16

Output State (Output 1) 10-17

Outputs 15-6

Over Temperature 10-21

Overview of Configuration Database 5-2

Overview of Matchcode 11-1, 11-3

P

Parity

aux port 6-8

Parity, Aux Port 6-8

Parity, Host Port 6-3

PDF Status 9-26

PDF417 9-26

Pharmacode 9-24

Pharmacode Status 9-24

Picket Fence A-20

Pitch 1-6

Placeholder Character 13-13

Point-to-Point (standard) 6-4

Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS 6-5

10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS & XON/XOFF 6-5

Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF 6-5

Polling Mode 6-5

Polling Reset A-28

Polling Sequence A-28

Position Symbol and Reader 1-1, 1-6

Postamble 6-1, 6-20

Postamble Character(s) 6-20

Postamble Status 6-20

Power Connector A-4

Power connector 1-2

Power Supply 1-2

Power-on Count 12-4

Power-on Parameters A-16

Power-on Saves 12-5

Preamble 6-1, 6-19

Preamble Character(s) 6-19

Preamble Status 6-19

Preferences 2-6

Programmable Beeps 3-3

Programmable Options 3-3

Protocol Commands A-15

Pulldown Menus 2-4

Pulse 10-18

Pulse Width (Output 1) 10-17

Pulse, discrete outputs 10-18

Q

Quality Output 10-1, 10-25

Quality Output Separator 10-25

Quick Start i-iii, 1-1

R

Range A-22

Range Mode Status 9-13

Raster Options 4-6

Raster Picket Fence Calculation A-21

Raster Setup 7-1, 7-22, 8-1, 8-3

Raster Status 3-7, 8-3, 10-27

Raster Sweep Rate 8-5

Raster/Laser i-iv, 8-1

Raster/Laser Setup by ESP 8-1, 8-2

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

11

Raster/Laser Setup by Serial Command 8-1, 8-2

Read Cycle i-iv, 7-1

Read Cycle by ESP 7-1, 7-2

Read Cycle by Serial Command 7-1, 7-3

Read Cycle On/Off 8-5

Read Cycle Timeout 7-15

Read Duration Output 10-1, 10-30

Read Ranges A-3

Read Rate 1-7, 3-4, 15-1, 15-3

Read Rate by ESP 15-3

Read Rate by Serial Command 15-3

Reader Connectors A-4

Reader Setup 7-1, 7-17

Recall customer default parameters and save for power-on 15-16, A-16

Recall factory default parameters and save for power-on 15-16, A-16

Receiving 2-13

Request All Master Symbols Data 15-11

Request Checksum 15-14

Request Master Symbol Data 15-11

Request Part Number 15-14

Request the Number of Master Symbols in ESP 15-9

Required 9-18, 9-28

Reset 15-16, A-16

Reset and recall customer default parameters 15-16, A-16

Reset and recall factory defaults 15-16, A-16

Reset and recall power-on parameters 15-16, A-16

Reset Counts 10-15

Resets 12-4

Resetting A-16

Resolution 12-10

Response Timeout 6-1, 6-22

RS-232 A-25

RS-232 Auxiliary Port 6-1, 6-8

RS-232/422 Host Port 6-1, 6-3

RS-422 A-25

RS-485 A-25

RSS 9-22

RSS Expanded 9-21

RSS Limited 9-22

RSS-14 9-23

Rule #1

Ordered Output 13-10

Rule #2

Ordered Output 13-10

Rule #3

Ordered Output 13-10

12

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

S

Safety Certifications A-2

Safety Labels i-ix

Save current settings as customer default parameters 15-16, A-16

Save current settings for power-on 15-16, A-16

Save Current Settings to Database 5-7

Save for Power-on 3-5

Saving 2-13, A-16

Scan Speed 7-17, A-22

Scan Speed Status 4-7

Scan Status 10-28

Scan Width A-21, A-22

Scanning Parameters A-2

Search 4-6

Secondary Reader 6-16

Select NUL as the Character A-13

Select Reader Model 1-1

Select Reset A-29

Select Sequence A-29

Send Current Command 2-14

Send Current View 2-14

Send Motor Off 15-7

Send Motor On 15-7

Send/Receive Options 2-13

Separator 10-26, 10-30

Separator Character 9-19, 9-28

Separator Status 9-18, 9-28

Sequence On Mismatch 11-1, 11-10

Sequence On Noread 11-1, 11-9

Sequence Step 11-1, 11-11

Sequential Matching 11-1, 11-5

Serial Command Beep Status 10-13

Serial Command Echo Status 10-12

Serial Command Format A-12

Serial Command Status Request A-13

Serial Communication Parameters A-27

Serial Configuration Commands A-8

Serial Data 7-9

Serial Data or External Edge 7-10

Serial Trigger 7-1, 7-12

Serial Trigger Character 7-12

Serial Utility Commands A-12

Serial Verification 10-1, 10-12

Service Message 12-1, 12-10

Service Message Status 12-10

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

13

Service Threshold 10-21

Set the Number of Master Symbols in ESP 15-9

Setup for Configuration Database 5-3

Setup Mode 2-12

Single Line Ladder Calculation A-20

Single Scan Line Picket Fence Calculation A-20

Sleep Mode 3-5

Software Default A-17

Specular reflection 1-6

Stacked Symbologies 9-1, 9-26

Start & Stop Match Status 9-14

Start & Stop Output Status 9-14

Start Character (non-delimited) 7-13

Start Position 13-5

Static Presentation (Green Flash) 10-10

Status 10-26, 10-30, 11-12, 11-13

Stop Bits, Aux Port 6-9

Stop Bits, Host Port 6-3

Stop Character (non-delimited) 7-13

Store Next Symbol as Master Symbol 15-11

Straight 4-7

Supplementals Status 9-18

Supplementals Type 9-19

Sweep Rate A-21

Symbol Configuration A-18

Symbol Data Output 10-1, 10-4

Symbol Data Output Status 10-4

Symbol Density A-22

Symbol Detect Status 7-20

Symbol Dimensions A-22

Symbol Length 9-5, 9-7, 9-15, 9-20, 9-24, 13-12, A-21

Symbol Length #1 9-12

Symbol Length #2 9-12

Symbol Position Output 10-1, 10-27

Symbol Position Separator 10-29

Symbol Ratio A-22

Symbol Speed A-20, A-21

Symbol Type 15-1, 15-15

Symbologies i-iv, 9-1, A-2

Symbologies by ESP 9-1, 9-2

Symbologies by Serial Command 9-1, 9-3

Symbology Detect 4-9

Symbology ID 9-1, 9-30

Symbology Type 13-12

14

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

T

Table of Contents i-iii

Terminal Mode i-vi, 14-1

Terminal Pulldown Menu 14-5

Terminal tab 2-7

Terminal Window 14-1, 14-2

Terminal Window Functions 14-1, 14-5

Test 2-2

Test for Read Rate 1-1, 1-7

This Manual i-viii

Threshold 12-10

Timeout 7-14

Timeout or New Trigger 7-15

Top Offset 8-4

Tracking 7-17

Transition Counter 7-21

Transparent Mode 6-10

Trend Analysis 10-17

Trend Analysis (Output 1) 10-19

Trend Analysis (output 2) 10-23

Trend Analysis (output 3) 10-24

Trend Analysis Mode 10-19

Trigger 3-6, 7-1, 7-6

Trigger Connector A-4

Trigger connector 1-2

Trigger Connector, 4-pin A-4

Trigger Counter 15-5

Trigger Counter Reset 15-5

Trigger Evaluation Period 10-20

Trigger Filter Duration 7-11

Trigger Mode 7-6

Troubleshooting A-23

U

Unlatch Output 10-15

UPC Status 9-17

UPC/EAN 9-17

UPC-E Output to UPC-A 9-19

USB A-25

User Defined Address 6-6

User Defined Example 6-7

User Defined Multidrop 6-7

User Defined Point-to-Point 6-6

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

15

Using Configuration Symbols A-19

Using ESP i-iii, 2-1

Using Master Symbols 11-1, 11-3

Using Multisymbol with Output Format 13-9

Using the EZ Button 3-3

Utilities i-vi, 15-1

Utilities by ESP 15-1, 15-2

Utility and configuration commands A-12

V

Video Status 4-7

View 2-11

W

Warning and Caution Summary i-x

Warranty i-vii

When to Output Symbol Data 10-6

Wild Card Character 11-1, 11-8

Wildcard Character 13-13

Wildcard/Placeholder Matches 13-13

Within a Serial Command 6-19, 6-20

Within an Embedded Menu 6-19, 6-20

Z

Zoom 15-12

16

MS-860 Industrial Raster Reader User’s Manual

Terms and Conditions of Sale

1.

Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed part of all quotes, agreements, purchase orders, acknowledgments, price lists, catalogs, manuals, brochures and other documents, whether electronic or in writing, relating to the sale of products or services (collectively, the "Products") by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies (“Omron”). Omron objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer’s purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms.

2.

Prices; Payment Terms. All prices stated are current, subject to change without notice by Omron. Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders. Payments for Products are due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice.

3.

Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and duties, and will be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Omron’s payment terms and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts.

4.

Interest. Omron, at its option, may charge Buyer 1-1/2% interest per month or the maximum legal rate, whichever is less, on any balance not paid within the stated terms.

5.

Orders. Omron will accept no order less than $200 net billing.

6.

Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the importation or sale of the Products.

7.

Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon, imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Omron for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importation, consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder (including customs duties and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Omron.

8.

Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Omron, Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Omron may (without liability and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Products sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due, which are owing to it by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts.

9.

Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses.

10. Force Majeure. Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods, strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority.

11. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron: a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron; Omron will not drop ship except in “break down” situations.

b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer; c. All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point (unless otherwise stated in writing by Omron), at which point title and risk of loss shall pass from Omron to Buyer; provided that Omron shall retain a security interest in the Products until the full purchase price is paid; d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only; and e. Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against normal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions.

12. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the

Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transportation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products from Omron in the condition claimed.

13. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the

Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.

(b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL-

ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS.

BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE

PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR

INTENDED USE. Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or otherwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omron’s sole obligation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying

Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsible for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Products unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were properly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamination, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by

Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Companies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components, circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing, are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.

See http://oeweb.omron.com or contact your Omron representative for published information.

14. Limitation on Liability; Etc. OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE

FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY

WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS

BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.

Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual price of the Product on which liability is asserted.

15. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and their employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, investigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Omron is a party) which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Products. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or settle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party.

16. Property; Confidentiality. Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclusive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Omron. Notwithstanding any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Omron. All information and materials supplied by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary, and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party.

17. Export Controls. Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws, regulations and licenses regarding (i) export of products or information; (iii) sale of products to

“forbidden” or other proscribed persons; and (ii) disclosure to non-citizens of regulated technology or information.

18. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver of rights by Omron. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Omron's written consent. (c) Law. These Terms are governed by the law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which

Buyer is purchasing the Products (without regard to conflict of law principles). (d) Amendment. These Terms constitute the entire agreement between

Buyer and Omron relating to the Products, and no provision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. (e) Severability. If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate any other provision. (f) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (g) Definitions. As used herein, “including” means “including without limitation”; and “Omron Companies” (or similar words) mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect subsidiary or affiliate thereof.

Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use

1.

Suitability of Use. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the

Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request,

Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Product in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system.

Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a non-exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given:

(i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document.

(ii) Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities.

(iii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.

(iv) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Product.

NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS

RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT

ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO

ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON’S PRODUCT IS PROP-

ERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE

OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

2.

Programmable Products. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence thereof.

3.

Performance Data. Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

4.

Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.

5.

Errors and Omissions. Information presented by Omron Companies has been checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.

OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC

1

Commerce Drive

Schaumburg, IL

60173

847.843.7900

For US technical support or other inquiries:

800.556.6766

OMRON CANADA, INC.

885

Milner Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M

1

B

5

V

8

416.286.6465

OMRON ON-LINE

Global - http://www.omron.com

USA - http://www.omron.com/oei

Canada - http://www.omron.ca

MS860MAN 8/06 ©2006 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC Specifications subject to change without notice.

Printed in the U.S.A.

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents